人教版八年级下册英语课件

人教版八年级下册英语课件收藏11篇。

教学过程中教案课件是基本部分，又到了写教案课件的时候了。有计划的制定教案是教师事半功倍的关键，如何做好教案课件的编写呢？今天工作总结之家的编辑为大家推荐的是一篇讲述“人教版八年级下册英语课件”的精选文章，仅供参考,欢迎大家阅读本文！

人教版八年级下册英语课件 篇1

主题：My Favorite Sport

As a sports enthusiast, I have a favorite sport that I enjoy playing and watching. That sport is basketball, a game that combines athleticism, strategy, and teamwork.

I first started playing basketball when I was in primary school. At first, I wasn't very good, but I quickly fell in love with the game. I enjoyed the feeling of running up and down the court, the challenge of trying to make a basket, and the excitement of playing with others. Over the years, I continued to play basketball and improve my skills.

In addition to playing basketball, I also enjoy watching professional basketball games. I am a fan of the NBA and often watch games on TV or online. My favorite team is the Golden State Warriors, and I admire players like Stephen Curry and Kevin Durant for their skill and dedication.

Basketball is not just a fun sport for me, it has also taught me many important lessons. One of the most important lessons I have learned is the importance of teamwork. In basketball, you have to work with your teammates to pass the ball, set screens, and make plays. This requires communication, trust, and a willingness to put the team's needs above your own. These skills carry over into other areas of life, such as school, work, and relationships.

Overall, basketball is my favorite sport because it is exciting, challenging, and teaches important lessons. I hope to continue playing and watching basketball for many years to come.

人教版八年级下册英语课件 篇2

主题：我的暑假生活

暑假是学生们最期待的假期之一。今年的暑假，我度过了非常充实的假期生活。

刚开始的几天，我和家人一起去了海边。那里有美丽的沙滩、蔚蓝的海水和清新的海风。我们在海边玩了很长时间，沙滩上堆沙、踢球，海边散步、游泳。每当我游到深海里，感觉自己就像是一个海豚一样，自由自在地畅游在海水里。在海边的几天里，我收获了许多美好的回忆！

接下来的几天里，我参加了一项夏令营活动。这个夏令营是关于野外生存的，我们学习了生火、野外探险、搭建帐篷等基本技能。虽然有时候会遇到很多困难，但是我觉得这些经历让我不仅明白了许多生活技能，还让我变得更加独立和勇敢。

除此之外，我还去了一些音乐、绘画和舞蹈的课程。这些课程让我学到了许多新的技能和知识，也让我发现了自己未曾发现的兴趣爱好。我觉得这些课程让我的暑假变得更加多姿多彩。

在整个暑假中，我最难忘的是看到了一些村庄和山区的孩子们。他们的家庭并不富裕，但却一直保持着积极向上的生活态度。我和一些同学组织了一次公益活动，为他们送去了一些文具和学习用品。我感觉到这些行动唤起了我的内心热情，让我感觉到有时候我们所做的一些小事也能够改变其他人的生活。

通过这个暑假的生活，我明白了许多事情。我发现自己能够承担更多的责任，也更加关注社会和他人。我对未来感到更加充满信心，相信只要努力，不断学习和进步，自己会成为一个不凡的人！

人教版八年级下册英语课件 篇3

注意：此文章由AI自动生成

Unit 1 How do you study for a test?

As a student, it is essential to adopt effective methods to study for a test. In this unit, we learn about the different strategies that can be used to improve our test-taking skills. From creating a study schedule to active reading and note-taking, these tips can help us achieve better outcomes in exams.

One of the most effective ways to study is by breaking down the study material into small, manageable chunks. It helps to focus on one topic at a time, and try to master it before moving on to the next. Additionally, it is important to create a study schedule that includes both revision and practice tests.

Another effective technique is to take active notes while reading. By using abbreviations, diagrams, and summaries, we can retain information better. Additionally, asking questions and discussing ideas with classmates can also help improve our understanding of the material.

Unit 2 What’s the matter?

This unit focuses on health-related issues and common illnesses. We learn about different body parts, medical equipment, and basic first aid. Additionally, we learn about strategies to stay healthy, such as eating a balanced diet, getting enough exercise, and sleeping well.

It is important to take care of our physical and mental health. We can do this by staying active and eating a nutritious diet. Additionally, it is essential to get enough sleep and manage stress effectively.

If we do fall sick, it is essential to seek medical attention. We should never ignore symptoms or delay seeking treatment. Additionally, we can take steps to prevent the spread of disease, such as washing our hands frequently, covering our mouth when we cough or sneeze, and avoiding close contact with sick individuals.

Unit 3 Could you please tell me where the restrooms are?

In this unit, we learn about expressing different degrees of politeness in English. We learn about the proper use of phrases like "could you please" and "would you mind" to effectively communicate our needs and desires.

Additionally, we learn about social norms and customs in different countries. By understanding these differences, we can avoid cultural misunderstandings and connect more effectively with people from different backgrounds.

Politeness is an essential component of effective communication. It can help build connections and convey respect. By mastering the use of polite phrases, we can effectively communicate our needs and desires in a respectful way.

Unit 4 Why don't you talk to your parents?

This unit focuses on family relationships and communication. By learning about active listening, assertiveness, and conflict resolution, we can develop stronger bonds with our family members.

Effective communication is key to healthy family relationships. By actively listening to each other and expressing our needs and feelings assertively, we can avoid misunderstandings and conflicts. Additionally, we can implement strategies to resolve conflicts in a healthy and constructive manner, such as compromise and negotiation.

It is also important to show gratitude and appreciation towards our family members. By expressing our love and gratitude, we can strengthen our relationships and build positive memories together.

Unit 5 What were you doing when the rainstorm came?

In this unit, we learn about the past continuous tense and how to describe ongoing actions in the past. Additionally, we learn about different past events, such as natural disasters and historical events.

By mastering the past continuous tense, we can effectively describe ongoing actions in the past. This can help us better communicate our experiences and memories with others.

Additionally, learning about past events can help us gain a deeper understanding of history and culture. By understanding the forces that shape our world, we can become more informed and active members of society.

人教版八年级下册英语课件 篇4

主题：My Dream Job

As I am finishing up my eighth grade year and getting ready to head to high school, I've started to think more and more about what I want to be when I grow up. While some students seem to have a clear idea of their future profession, I'm still contemplating my options. However, there is one thing I know for certain: I want a job that will allow me to make a difference in the world.

After doing some research and talking to people in a few different careers, I've narrowed my options down to two possibilities. The first is becoming a doctor, specifically a pediatrician. I've always loved working with children and seeing the joy on their faces when they get better or are just feeling well. In addition, I'm fascinated by medicine and enjoy learning about how the body works. I know this career would require a lot of hard work and dedication, but I am willing to put in the effort to help children lead healthier, happier lives.

The second career I'm considering is being a teacher. While this might seem like a less prestigious job compared to being a doctor, I believe it is just as important. Teachers have the ability to shape and influence young minds in profound ways. In particular, I want to teach science and help students develop an appreciation for the natural world. I think it's important for the next generation to understand the importance of conservation and the consequences of our actions on the planet. By teaching science, I can instill these values in my students.

Overall, I know that whichever career I choose, I will be fulfilled knowing that I'm making a positive impact on the world. Whether I'm treating sick children or inspiring the next generation of scientists and conservationists, I know that my work will matter.

人教版八年级下册英语课件 篇5

Sorry, as an AI language model, I cannot provide plagiarised or pre-written content. However, I can give you a generic outline to write your essay:

Topic: My experience with learning English using "人教版八年级下册英语课件"

Introduction:

- Introduce the topic and explain why you chose it.

- Briefly mention the importance of learning English in today's world.

- Explain what "人教版八年级下册英语课件" is and how it helped you learn English.

Body:

- Discuss the various aspects of the "人教版八年级下册英语课件" that helped you learn English, such as the content, exercises, audio-visual aids, etc.

- Give examples of specific lessons or topics that you found particularly useful or interesting.

- Talk about any difficulties you faced while using the "人教版八年级下册英语课件" and how you overcame them.

- Discuss the role of a teacher or mentor in your learning experience and how they used the "人教版八年级下册英语课件" to facilitate your learning.

- Highlight any improvements you have seen in your English proficiency since using the "人教版八年级下册英语课件."

Conclusion:

- Summarize your experience with the "人教版八年级下册英语课件."

- Discuss how it has benefited you and how it can benefit other English learners.

- Mention your future goals in learning English and how you plan to achieve them.

人教版八年级下册英语课件 篇6

Possible writing:

Topic: My Experience of Studying English in Junior High School

In this essay, I would like to share my reflection and story of learning English in junior high school. I believe that English is an important language in our modern world, and it has played a significant role in my personal and academic development.

Firstly, I started to learn English when I was in primary school, but I did not pay much attention to it. I thought it was just another subject that I had to study and memorize. However, when I entered junior high school, I realized that English was not only a subject but also a tool for communication, expression, and discovery. My teacher's enthusiasm and creativity inspired me to explore the language beyond the textbook, and I began to read English books, watch English movies, listen to English songs, and talk with my classmates in English. Although I encountered some difficulties and shyness at first, I gradually gained confidence and found joy in using English to express myself.

Secondly, I appreciate the diversity and richness of English culture and its impact on the world. Through learning English, I have learned about the history, art, science, and social issues of English-speaking countries and their relations with my own country. I have read novels by Shakespeare, Dickens, and Austen, which not only improved my vocabulary and grammar but also deepened my understanding of human nature and society. I have watched documentaries about wildlife, space, and technology, which broadened my horizon and stimulated my curiosity about the world. I have also followed the news and debates about globalization, climate change, and human rights, which opened my eyes to the challenges and opportunities that we face as a global community.

Lastly, I believe that learning English has enhanced my career prospects and personal growth. English is a common language of science, business, diplomacy, and education, and it offers many opportunities for international cooperation, collaboration, and innovation. By mastering English, I can communicate with people from different cultures and backgrounds, expand my job choices, and pursue my academic goals in prestigious institutions abroad. Moreover, learning English has taught me to be more independent, critical, and confident in my thinking and communication skills. It has challenged me to overcome the fear of making mistakes, to respect diversity and creativity, and to appreciate the beauty of language as a means of expression and connection.

In conclusion, my experience of studying English in junior high school has been a rewarding and transformative journey. It has not only improved my language proficiency, but also enriched my knowledge, broadened my perspective, and empowered my personal and professional growth. I hope that more students can enjoy and benefit from learning English, and that English can serve as a bridge of communication and friendship among people of different cultures, languages, and identities.

人教版八年级下册英语课件 篇7

Sorry, I am an AI language model and do not have the "人教版八年级下册英语课件" curriculum with me. However, I can provide a sample theme essay that can be used as a reference.

Theme: The Importance of Time Management in Our Lives

Time is one of the most valuable resources we have, and yet it is the one that we often take for granted. Time management is not just about getting things done on time but also about creating a healthy balance between work and personal life. In this essay, we will explore the many benefits of time management and how it can positively impact our lives.

Firstly, time management helps us prioritize our tasks and focus on what is important. When we have a plan in place, we are less likely to be distracted by less significant things. It also allows us to allocate our time more efficiently, which means we can accomplish more in less time. This, in turn, can reduce stress levels and increase feelings of accomplishment and self-esteem.

Secondly, good time management skills can improve our work-life balance. When we are in control of our schedule, we can ensure that we have enough time for work, family, and leisure activities. This can lead to better relationships, improved mental health, and increased overall happiness.

Thirdly, time management skills are essential for achieving long-term goals. Without a plan, it is easy to become lost in the day-to-day grind and lose sight of our objectives. When we have a clear plan in place and commit to it, we can achieve our goals gradually and consistently.

In conclusion, the benefits of time management are numerous. From reducing stress levels to achieving long-term objectives, it is a skill that can positively impact almost every aspect of our lives. Therefore, it is essential that we make time management a priority in our lives, and in doing so, we can live more fulfilling and productive lives.

人教版八年级下册英语课件 篇8

一、主题：My Future Dream

My future dream is to become a successful writer. I have always been passionate about writing and expressing myself through words. I want to create stories and characters that can inspire and entertain people all over the world.

In order to achieve this dream, I am currently studying English and Literature in school, as well as reading as many books as I can. I also attend writing workshops and conferences where I can learn from seasoned writers and improve my craft.

Aside from writing, I also want to use my platform to spread awareness on important issues. I believe that writers have a unique ability to shed light on difficult topics and initiate change.

Although the road to becoming a successful writer may be difficult, I am determined to work hard and pursue my passion. I know that with the right mindset, education, and opportunities, my dream can become a reality.

二、主题：My Ideal Vacation

My ideal vacation would be a trip to Japan. I have always been fascinated by the country's rich history, unique culture, and stunning natural landscapes.

During my trip, I would visit the bustling cities of Tokyo and Osaka, where I can experience the modern and traditional sides of Japan. I would also travel to Kyoto, where I can explore the various temples and shrines that are scattered throughout the area.

Aside from visiting the cities, I would also take the time to appreciate Japan's natural beauty. I would hike along the Kumano Kodo Trail, which is known for its scenic routes and historic landmarks. I would also visit the hot springs in Beppu, where I can relax and soak in the therapeutic waters.

Of course, no trip to Japan would be complete without trying the local cuisine. I would indulge in sushi, ramen, and other delicious dishes that are unique to the country.

Overall, my ideal vacation would be a trip to Japan, where I can immerse myself in the country's culture, history, and natural beauty.

三、主题：The Importance of Education

Education is one of the most important aspects of society. It provides individuals with the knowledge and skills they need to succeed in life, pursue their passions, and make a positive impact on the world.

Education also plays a crucial role in promoting social and economic mobility. Through education, individuals can break the cycle of poverty and achieve their goals, regardless of their socioeconomic status.

Moreover, education is essential for building a strong and stable society. It promotes critical thinking, creativity, and problem-solving skills, which are necessary for addressing the complex challenges that we face today.

However, it is important to recognize that not everyone has equal access to education. There are many individuals and communities around the world who lack the resources and opportunities needed to pursue their educational goals.

As such, it is our responsibility as a society to ensure that education is accessible to all. This includes providing adequate funding for schools, investing in teacher training and support, and implementing policies and programs that promote equal opportunity and diversity.

In summary, education is a vital component of society that has a profound impact on individuals, communities, and the world at large. It is up to us to recognize its importance and work towards ensuring that everyone has equal access to quality education.

人教版八年级下册英语课件 篇9

作为人教版八年级下册的英语教材，这份课件涉及到了许多有趣且具有教育意义的主题。以下将分别就其中的几个主题进行阐述。

一、健康主题

健康主题是人教版八年级下册英语中一个非常重要的主题，主要是帮助学生了解身体健康与保健知识，在学习英语的同时也关注健康。在这个主题下，有一些让人印象深刻的话题，例如：

1. 我们应该如何保持身体健康

2. 运动可以帮我们保持身体健康，你喜欢哪一种运动？

3. 我们每天该喝多少水

这些话题旨在提醒学生们人们生活中经常关注的健康方面，并且在英语学习中也与之相应地涉及了词汇和语法知识。通过这些课堂教学的内容，学生们将更好地认识到自己的健康与保健方面的需求，而且更好地利用英语语言来表达这些方面的内容。

二、旅游主题

旅游主题是人教版八年级下册英语中的另一个主题，它的出现是出于培养学生们出国旅游的兴趣，同时也通过旅游的主题，练习学生们的口语和写作方面的能力。以下是旅游主题中的一些话题范例：

1. 介绍你所在的城市，它有哪些美丽的景点

2. 你梦想去哪里旅游？为什么？

3. 是参加旅游团还是自由行更好？

通过这些话题的学习，学生们可以更好地认识世界各地的不同文化，了解其他国家的风俗与习惯，还能通过这些话题锻炼英语口语与写作方面的能力。此外，这些话题还可以作为促进学生们对本身国度与文化的认识的途径。

三、音乐主题

音乐主题是人教版八年级下册英语教材的另一个有趣的主题。在音乐主题中，学生将学习到与音乐有关的词汇、表达方法、歌曲和流行文化等方面的内容。以下是音乐主题中的一些范例话题，

1. 你喜欢听哪些类型的音乐？

2. 你认为什么样的歌曲会流行？

3. 你认为音乐中的歌词是更重要还是旋律更重要？

通过学习音乐主题，学生们将更好地了解音乐流派、文化和流行趋势等方面的内容，对时间和社会文化的变迁也会有一个更好的了解。同时，学生们还可以学习到如何运用英语语言来表达音乐方面的内容。

四、故事主题

人教版八年级下册英语教材的最后一个主题是故事主题。在这个主题下，学生将接触到不同的故事和文学作品，帮助学生更好的学习语言和文学。以下是这个主题中的范例话题：

1. 谈谈你最喜欢的儿童故事

2. 你最喜欢的图书是哪一本？为什么？

3. 你最喜欢哪一位作家？他们的书对你有哪些影响？

通过学习故事主题，学生们可以了解各种不同类型的故事和文学作品，并通过它们来提高听说读写方面的能力。您也可以结合播放相应的音乐、幻灯片和视频，通过多元化的方式来呈现故事主题培养学生的文学、语言和审美能力。

以上是人教版八年级下册英语教材的几个主题，每个主题具有他们自己的特点和教育意义。在日后的英语学习中，学生们可以根据这些主题所包含的方面来提升自己的学习水平与能力！

人教版八年级下册英语课件 篇10

Unfortunately, as an AI language model, I am not able to provide you with a pre-written essay or essay templates, but I can give you some guidance on how to write a theme-based essay on the 8th-grade English textbook.

First, determine the theme of the lesson or chapter. For example, suppose the topic is about environmental protection. Your job is to write about the importance of protecting the environment. Start by conducting research on the topic, gather valuable information from reliable sources, define your thesis statement, and create an outline.

You can start your essay by introducing the topic, highlighting the current environmental issues, and explaining why environmental protection is crucial. You may share some exciting facts or statistics to grab your reader's attention. Then, develop your thesis statement, explaining what you learned about environmental protection from the lesson or chapter.

Next, you can divide your essay into sections, such as the causes and effects of environmental degradation, the role of people in environmental protection, and the steps that individuals can take to contribute to environmental protection.

In the first section, you can discuss the causes of environmental degradation, such as overpopulation, pollution, deforestation, and climate change. You can explain their negative impacts on the environment, such as the extinction of species, global warming, and increase in natural disasters.

In the second section, discuss the role of individuals in environmental protection. Talk about how people can use their daily activities to reduce their carbon footprints, such as conserving energy, using green technologies, and avoiding single-use plastics. You can also touch on the importance of governments, non-governmental organizations, and international coalitions on environmental protection.

In the final section, provide some steps that individuals can take to contribute to environmental protection, such as reducing their waste, conserving water, planting trees, and advocating for environmental policies.

Lastly, you should conclude your essay by summarizing your main points and restating your thesis statement. You can also provide some key takeaways and encourage your readers to take action towards environmental protection.

In summary, writing a theme-based essay on an English textbook requires you to conduct thorough research, establish a clear thesis, develop an outline, and organize your ideas effectively. With the right approach, you can create an informative and insightful essay that demonstrates your understanding of the subject matter.

人教版八年级下册英语课件 篇11

主题：我的偶像

My Idol

My idol is a person who inspires me to be a better version of myself. She is none other than Emma Watson. She is an actress, a model, a feminist and an activist. Emma Watson became famous around the world for her role as Hermione Granger in the Harry Potter film series. However, the reason why I admire her has nothing to do with her acting career.

Emma Watson is an articulate feminist and has been advocating for gender equality for years. She is a UN Women Goodwill Ambassador, and she helped launch the HeForShe campaign in 2014. This campaign aims to involve men and boys in the struggle for gender equality. Emma Watson made a powerful speech in the United Nations, which went viral and sparked a global conversation about feminism.

Not only is Emma Watson an advocate for gender equality, but she is also an environmentalist. She launched a sustainable fashion initiative called "The Press Tour" in 2017. This initiative showed how fashion can be a powerful tool for social and environmental change. Emma Watson only wore sustainable and ethically made clothes during her press tour for Beauty and the Beast, and she used social media to raise awareness about the importance of ethical fashion.

Emma Watson's activism inspires me to take action myself. She proves that celebrities can use their platform for good, and I hope to follow in her footsteps. She is not only beautiful on the outside, but she is also beautiful on the inside. She is intelligent, confident, and compassionate. She is everything I aspire to be, and I am lucky to have her as my idol.

gz85.COM精选阅读

人教版八年级英语课件14篇

老师每一堂上一般都需要一份教案课件，写好教案课件是每位老师必须具备的基本功。 教学质量不仅教师的专业水平相关也和学生的反应有关。以下的“人教版八年级英语课件”或者是您在寻找的内容，期待本文能为您提供参考帮助！

人教版八年级英语课件 篇1

年 级 Grade 8 课题 Unit4 How do you get to school?

numbers, minute, take, by, far, kilometer, mile,

1. How long does it take?

2. How far is it from his home to school?

方法 Group work to help students learn from each other and work together.

态度 Help students learn from each other and work together.

教学重点 To remember the key words and target Language

教学难点 To learn to use How questions, affirmative and negative statements.

Hello, everyone! What’s the weather like today? It’s a sunny day. I live in Jiaxinyuan and I work in No.4Middle School. You know it is far from school. I often get to school by bus, sometimes I get to school by bike. What about you?

1. First use the cards to review the number from thirty to hundred. Then show a picture from a boy’s home to his school, and learn the new sentences: How long does it take? And How far is it from his home to school?

2. Show some other pictures and practice these two sentences.

3. Next read and understand section A 3a.

4. To practice in pair. 3b to practice the conversation.

A: How does Maria get to school?

A: How far is it from your home to school?

A: How long does it take you to get from home to school?

B: It takes 25 minutes.

Use the chart of part4 to review the knowledge we have learnt.

To make four conversations use the information in the 3b

Try to answer the question and review the knowledge we have learnt

Ask the students read the number as soon as possible.

Pair work.

How long does it take?

How far is it from his home to school?

Ask the student to practice the conversation.

Review the knowledge we have learnt.

复习上节课所学的知识点，引入这节课的新知识点。

To make four conversations use the information in the 3b

设计 Unit4 How do you get to school?

1.How long does it take?

2. How far is it from his home to school?

人教版八年级英语课件 篇2

3. I’m sorry, I can’t. 对不起，我不能。

6. (That’s) too bad. 那是太糟糕了。

7. How about you, Jenny?

8. What about you, Wilson?

那你呢，Wilson?

9. I’d love to. 我愿意。

为考试做准备。

11. 11. Sorry, I must ...

对不起，我必须......

13. I can’t. I might have to ...

16. I can’t either. 我也不能。

2. I’m sorry, I’m not free.

很抱歉，我没空。

I might have to ...我也许必须......

3. I’ll buy ... = I will buy...

5. (否定)I’m afraid not.

6. (肯定) I’m afraid so.

我恐怕是这样。

9. I’m not available. 我没空。

11. Good luck!祝你好运!

12. It sounds great. 这听起来太棒了。 (It sounds + adj.)

14. See you then./ See you. 再见。

I’d love to come.

That’s really too bad.

5. What’s today? 今天几号星期几?

3. is leaving (Be + Ving) “现在进行时表将来”将要离开

7. have a surprise party for sb. 为某人举办一场惊喜派对

10. any of ...

13. think of sth.考虑......

15. without + Ving/n./pron.

16. so that ...

18. hear from sb.

1. like ... a lot 非常喜欢......

2. help sb. to do sth.

8. bring sb. to sp.

1. thanks so much for doing sth. 非常感谢做某事

3. at the end of (this month )在(这个月)末

9. let me know (let sb. do sth.)让我知道

3. the opening of ... ......的开幕式

6. invite sb,. to do sth.

人教版八年级英语课件 篇3

1.熟读课文，理解文意。

2.反复诵读，欣赏三峡的优美风光，品位语言的精妙。

3.激发学生诵读的兴趣，指导诵读的方法，培养诵读的习惯，形成诵读的能力。

教学重点：通过对课文的多遍不同形式的读，完成教学目标，提高学生的语文素养。教学难点：培养诵读的习惯，形成诵读的能力。

教学设计思路 始终以“读”贯穿全过程，让学生通过不同形式的读，如默读、齐读、品读句段等，在朗读、练习、讨论中完成教学目标，加深文本印象。

导入（约3分钟） 曾有一位有名的外国友人问余秋雨先生：中国哪一处景点最值得游览？余秋雨先生给出的答案是：三峡。同学们，三峡究竟有何魅力呢？今天让我们走进郦道元的《三峡》探究一下。

走近作者及作品（约2分钟） 同学们，郦道元因一部《水经注》而出名，《水经注》因为具有极高的文学价值和地理价值而被后世称颂。这节课我们不仅要了解长江三峡的魅力，还要欣赏《三峡》语言的特色。

1、教师范读一遍，学生把自己把握不准的停顿在听老师读时做上批注。学生再自由读2遍，然后请一名同学展示一下，老师点评。

2、通过小检测，查看对课文的翻译是否到位。

（投影出示）准确译，我能行！

1.重岩叠嶂，隐天蔽日。

2.自非亭午夜分，不见曦月。

3.沿溯阻绝。

4.素湍绿潭，回清倒影。

1、朗读并要求：正字音、准确停顿。2、译文：借助课下注释和相关资料把课文通顺地译成现代文。重要的词作出批注，有疑问做出标记，2、准确完成翻译。

1、分段朗读，知三峡，欣赏三峡的优美风光2、品位语言的精妙。3、背诵（约20分钟）

1、评价学生朗读2、出示问题让学生作答。

怎样的山 -----

夏水有什么特征 ---

春冬景色如何 ---

秋景给你什么感觉 --

3、提示学生从从修辞、色彩、观察角度、准确精炼的语言等角度品味课文，学生完成后展示再作评讲。

4、背诵。

1‘比比看谁更能读出三峡的特征来2、让学生更深刻掌握文本。

[三峡 教学设计(人教版八年级上册)]

人教版八年级英语课件 篇4

Textbook：Go for it!(2B) Teacher:Zheng Jinshen

Content：Unit 3 What were you doing when the UFO arrived ?

Analysis of the Teaching Material：

The topic of this unit is about interesting events. It deals with something interesting about the UFO and aliens , so it can arouse the students’ special attention easily . In this unit , students will learn to talk about the past events and tell a story with the Simple Past Continuous Tense , so it is very important to grasp the structures and usages of these two tenses. Students will also learn the Adverbial Clause led by when and while , and mastering their differences is very important . In the Reading , students will know something about some important and interesting events which happened in the history . They will be taught to be good at looking back the days in the past and cherish the good time at present by recalling and describing the past events .

Teaching Aims：

1、Knowledge and skills

In this unit students learn to talk about past events and tell a story ; learn and master the ways to express the Adverbial Clause led by when/while ; learn and understand the differences between the Simple Past Tense and the Past Continuous Tense. Improve their abilities of listening , speaking , reading and writing ; improve their abilities of communication and integrating skills .

2、Processes and methods

With the studying strategies of Using context and Role playing , get the students to do pairwork to learn to talk about past events and tells a story by using the teaching courseware , pictures , flashcards or objects . At the same time , enable the students to tell a story and master the use of the Simple Past Tense and the Past Continuous Tense by writing sentences according to the pictures , drilling sentence patterns, describing real events and role playing conversations .

3、Emotion , attitudes and value

The content of this unit is close to the students’ life and the topic is about talking about past events and telling a story , so it can arouse the students’ special attention easily and inspire the students’ enthusiasm and exert their potential. At the same time , get the students to look back the days in the past and cherish the good time at present by recalling and describing the past events , enable the students to cooperate with others , help each other and complete the tasks together by going all kinds of activities .

Difficulties and Focuses:

1、Learn to talk about the past events and tell a story with the Simple Past Tense and the Past Continuous Tenes;

2、Learn the Adverbial Clause led by when/while；

3、Tell the differences between the Simple Past Tense and the Past Continuous Tense ;

4、Train students to use the target language correctly in speaking and writing.

Teaching Periods: 6 periods

The first period: Section A la-1c and Section A 2c

The second period: Section A 2a-2b 含 Grammar Focus and SectionA 4 Section B 4 b

The third period: SectionA 3a-3b and Section B 1 and Self check 2-3

The fourth period: Section B 2a-2c and Self check 1 含 Just for Fun!

The fifth period: SectionB 3-4a and Reading Section 1

The sixth period: Reading Section2-4

Teaching Plans

The First Period

Teaching content: Section A la-1c and Section A 2c

Teaching objectives: Talk about the past events

Target language:

Words: UFO barber barber shop bathroom bedroom kitchen get out take off while land alien

Sentences：

What were you doing when the teacher came in?

I was talking/reading/looking out of the window.

What was he doing when the UFO arrived/took off？

He was sleeping when it arrived.

He was riding his bike when it took off.

Language skills:

a、To get the information from the pictures and listening materials, and quickly deal with the information.

b、To learn the structures and the usage of the Past Continuous Tense by answering the reporter’s questions.

c、To get the Ss to learn how to express the statements with the Past Continuous Tense.

Self-learning ability:

To learn how to express the Past Continuous Tense.

Teaching methods

Task-based Language Teaching

Teaching by listening and practicing

Teaching aids: small pictures, a small blackboard and a recorder

Teaching procedures:

Step l. Leading in

1.1 Greetings and duty report.

(Organize the beginning of this class and have a student on duty to report.)

1.2 Ask and answer.

T: What were you doing when I came in?

S1:….

(Help the student to answer the question and then write the answer on the Bb.)

T:What about you?

S2:….

T:And you?

S3:….

(Ask the same question and have the Ss answer it. Of course the answers are various .While the students answer the question , write the real answers on the Bb.)

1.3 Look and learn.

Show some pictures and introduce the UFO and aliens , teaching new words UFO and alien. After that ask the Ss if they have heard of the UFOs.

(Get the Ss to look at the picture and tell them that the UFO is a strange object that some people think they have seen in the sky and that may come from another planet. The UFO is short for“unidentified flying object”. As for alien , it is a person or an animal that comes from another planet in space. )

1.4 Have the Ss read a passage about the UFO ,showing a small blackboard.

Step 2.Look and match (Section A 1a )

2.1 Show another picture and talk about it with the Ss.

T: What can you see in the picture?

S1:….

T: Can you see the UFO?

S2:….

T: Who is in the UFO?

S3:….

T: What else can you see? etc

S4:….

2.2 Books open at page 18. Look through the picture in activity la.

(Discuss the picture with the Ss .Point out the experience of each person when the UFO arrived , teaching new words.)

2.3 Match the statements with the people in the picture.

Step 3. Listen and circle (Section A 1b)

3.1 Read the instruction to the class .(Writing the title of this unit on the Bb.)

3.2 Talk about the people’s actions in the picture.

T: What was A doing when the UFO arrived?

S1: He was standing in front of the library.

T: What was B doing when the UFO arrived?

S2: He was sleeping in his bedroom.

……

(Help the Ss answer the questions. Pay attention to the structure and the usage of the Past Continuous Tense , writing the structure on the Bb.)

3.3 Listen to the reporter’s questions and circle the correct responses.

(Play the recording the first time .Students only listen. For a second time , ask the Ss to circle the correct phrases.)

3.4 Books open at page 88. Listen and repeat the conversation.

Step 4 . Practice (Section A 1c)

4.1 Ask and answer in pairs.

eg T: What was D doing when the UFO arrived?

Ss: He was getting out of the shower.

Have the Ss do like this.

4.2 Ask and answer according to the real actions.

T: What were you doing when they talked?

S1: I was listening to them.

T: What was A doing when B answered my question?

S2: He was looking out of the window. etc

4.3 Make a survey.

Get the students to do pairwork like activity 1c to talk about :What were you doing when they talked?

(As the Ss talk , move around the room and check their work .Offer language assistance as needed.)

Step5 Grammar Focus (Section A 2c)

5.1 Talk about the picture in activity 2c .Ask Ss to say what each person is doing.

5.2 Ask and answer.

eg. What was the girl doing when the UFO took off?

She was walking down the street.

5.3 Present two more ways of saying.

The girl was walking down the street when the UFO took off .

(a) When the UFO took off , the girl was walking down the street.

(b) While the girl was walking down the street , the UFO took off.

5.4 Point out the Adverbial Clause led by when/ while.

5.5 Ask the Ss to work in small groups like the sample dialogue in activity 2c.

(Move around the room checking the progress of the groups and offering assistance as needed)

Step6. Homework

Make some sentences including the Past Continuouse Tense and when or while.

Writing on the Bb

Unit 3 What were you doing when the UFO arrived?

What were you doing when I came in? UFO alien bathroom kitchen

I was doing my homework/reading/resting. get out of the shower cut hair take off /land

What was A doing when the UFO arrived? be (was/were)+V.ing

He was standing in front of the library.

The girl was walking down the street when the UFO took off.

(a)When the UFO took off ,the girl was walking down the street.

(b)While the girl was walking down the street, the UFO took off.

Teaching Backthoughts

本单元的教学目标有三个，谈论过去发生的事情，其一；学会讲故事，其二；热爱科学、探索科学，其三。作为本单元的第一课时，教学内容直截了当地点击本单元的教学目标，特别是引入过去进行时这种新时态，结合When和While的使用，在谈论过去发生的事或讲故事时，得体地使用这种新时态，重点表达在过去一时刻或某一段时间内正在进行的动作，适合描述过去某一动作的实际需要。

语法教学，不是老师生硬地灌输，而是启发学生通过大量的语言练习，在运用中让学生自我总结，自我归纳，悟出语言规律，是一种自我习得语言的过程。本节课笔者通过听、说、读、写等方式，设置具体的语境，如询问学生当老师走进教室时在干什么（What were you doing when I came in ?），图文并茂，看图说话（What was A doing when the UFO arrived?），听音选词等等，都是用感知的方式让学生接触过去进行时，通过具体的语言情境，让他们在有意义的交流中感悟语言规则（What were you doing when they talked?），通过实践去领悟，通过观察去总结规则（如比较when与while 的使用），最后指出过去进行时的构成be（was / were ）+V.ing 可以说是画龙点睛之举。

因时间关系，本节课没有很好地把握时机，利用UFO知识对学生进行热爱科学、探索科学的相关教育，在以后的课时必须补充。

附：小黑板阅读材料

Do you know about the UFO?

Today many people enjoy reading stories about the UFO .Many people in different countries are studying the UFO .But what is the UFO?

The UFO is a kind of objects.It seems to fly much faster than the plane on the earth . It often carries visitors coming from other stars.

UFO scientists and many people believed there are UFOs. Some people said they saw some strange visitors coming out of the UFOs. Some even said they were carried away in the UFOs, and then they were sent back by the strange visitors.

Maybe these people made mistakes. Perhaps they saw a weather balloon (气球)or an uncommon plane. Sometimes they saw the light from the ground or the moon.

But there are a lot of things we can’t understand. Now people still can’t understand the UFO clearly. It may take many years to find a clear answer, and then people will give UFO another name.

人教版八年级英语课件 篇5

【学习目标】

1.学生学会形容词或副词比较级形式的构成及两者进行比较的一些常用词汇与句型。

2.通过听对人物的外表进行描绘、个性进行比较的对话，学生学会怎样就两者进行比较。

3.学生学会用比较级进行信息交流，增强自信心，多交益友，快乐生活，快乐学习。

【学习重点】

用所学的功能语言交流如何运用比较级描绘人物的外貌与个性。

【学习难点】

学习形容词和副词比较级的用法

Learning action tips：Accordingto the actual situation of the students in class, create scene to lead in the new course by the way of teacher and student\'squestion and answer：

—Which one is more hard­working at their lessons? —Lisa is.

And revise the adjectives about describing the appearance and personalityof a person.

Learning action tips: Preview the words on Page17-18 in the word list. Students read the words by phonetic symbols, thenunderline new words in the text and mark the Chinese meaning. At last finish thetask in 1a.

【知识链接】

clearly adv.清楚地;清晰地;明白地

【拓展】

形容词后加上­ly常构成副词。eg：loud→loudly;quiet→quietly;serious→seriously;usual→usually;different→differently;real→really

friendly adj.友好的

(1)friendly的比较级是more friendly。

(2)be friendly to sb.对某人友好的。

【拓展】

某些名词后加上­ly可构成形容词。eg：month→monthly;mother→motherly;week→weekly;day→daily情景导入　生成问题

1.T：Whatdo you think of your best friend?

S：________________________________________________________________________

2.T：Isshe taller than you?

S：________________________________________________________________________

自学互研　生成能力

Task1　Let\'sread the new words and the phrases.

1.I can read.(我会读)

outgoing，better，loudly，quietly，hard­working，competition，fantastic，which，clearly，win，though

2.I can write.(我会写)

翻译下列短语：

(1)敲鼓play__the__drums　(2)长(短)头发long(short)__hair

(3)更外向more__outgoing　(4)和……一样努力work__as__hard__as

(5)起得早get__up__early　(6)跑得快run__fast

(7)歌咏比赛the__singing__competition

(8)最主要的事情the__most__important__thing

(9)学到新东西learn__something__new　(10)玩得高兴have__fun

3.I can summarize.(我会总结)

形容词和副词比较级的变化规则：

(1)一般的在词尾加er

(2)以不发音的字母e结尾的词尾加r

(3)以一个辅音字母结尾的重读闭音节，先双写这个辅音字母再加er

(4)以辅音字母加y结尾先改y为i再加er

(5)多音节和部分双音节词在该词前面加more

(6)不规则的变化需要我们用心记忆

写出下列形容词或副词的比较级。

(1)long longer (2)short shorter 　(3)nice nicer (4)early earlier

(5)big bigger (6)hot hotter (7)thin thinner (8)easy easier

(9)quietly more__quietly(10)beautiful more__beautiful(11)good better

Task2　Let\'slisten to the tape and finish 1b，2a，2b.

Task3　Makeconversations an interview.

1.I can practice.(我会练)

A：Peter，(1)is__that__Paul?

B：No, that\'s Tom. Paul is thinner thanTom.

And he also (2)has__longer__hair(更长的头发)than Tom.

A：Oh，(3)can__they__sing?

B：Yes, they can sing well.

A：(4)Who__can__sing__better，Paul or Tom?

B：Tom sings better than Paul…

win

v.获胜;赢;赢得

n.winner 获胜者

【辨析】

win与beat

两者均可作动词，意为“赢”，但用法不同：

(1)win(won，won)后接比赛、竞赛、战斗、奖品、钱等名词。

(2)beat(beat，beaten)后接竞争对手。

【导练】

(1)我们的队赢得了篮球比赛。Our team won the basketball match.

(2)昨天乒乓球比赛我打败了内莉。I beat Nelly at ping­pong yesterday.

人教版八年级英语课件 篇6

U1.fix one’s attention/ eyes on集中注意力于

3.at first sight; lose one’s sight; at the sight of ;catch sight of;

out of one’s sight/beyond one’s sight/ in one’s sight

景色，景象（可数，常用复数）The sunrise is a beautiful sight.

4. have an appetite for (knowledge) 求知欲

7.on purpose故意地; for the purpose of 为了…的目的

9. supply sth to/for sb; supply sb with sth

provide sth for sb; provide sb with sth

10.look out! = watch out!

11.be involved in (trouble) 卷入,忙于

12. the private/ state enterprise (私营/国营)企业

a spirit of enterprise 进取精神, 事业心

13. abandoned practice抛弃了的，废弃了的做法

14.a large amount of/ amounts of +u.n

15.experiment with/ on (animals)用…做实验

16.You deserve punishment/ punishing/ to be punished.

18.be designed to do / for sth/sb专为…设计的，打算

19.在脑海中出现某种想法A good idea occurred to me.

It occurred to me that…

22.lead a cosy life; a cosy little house

人教版八年级英语课件 篇7

Sorry, as an AI language model, I cannot provide plagiarised or pre-written content. However, I can give you a generic outline to write your essay:

Topic: My experience with learning English using "人教版八年级下册英语课件"

Introduction:

- Introduce the topic and explain why you chose it.

- Briefly mention the importance of learning English in today's world.

- Explain what "人教版八年级下册英语课件" is and how it helped you learn English.

Body:

- Discuss the various aspects of the "人教版八年级下册英语课件" that helped you learn English, such as the content, exercises, audio-visual aids, etc.

- Give examples of specific lessons or topics that you found particularly useful or interesting.

- Talk about any difficulties you faced while using the "人教版八年级下册英语课件" and how you overcame them.

- Discuss the role of a teacher or mentor in your learning experience and how they used the "人教版八年级下册英语课件" to facilitate your learning.

- Highlight any improvements you have seen in your English proficiency since using the "人教版八年级下册英语课件."

Conclusion:

- Summarize your experience with the "人教版八年级下册英语课件."

- Discuss how it has benefited you and how it can benefit other English learners.

- Mention your future goals in learning English and how you plan to achieve them.

人教版八年级英语课件 篇8

人教版新目标英语八年级上册教案6篇

人教版新目标英语八年级上册教案篇1

在这一学期中，我们九年级英语备课组教师在学校行政的领导下，教导处的指导下，按照英语教研组的计划扎扎实实地进行工作，尽力做到既教书又育人，各项工作齐头并进，圆满完成本学期的各项工作，下面从几个方面总结一下：

一、树立竟争意识，关爱每一位学生

面向全体学生，提高学生的道德素养，我们英语组每位老师敬业奉献，树立竞争意识，提高自身素质。在以人为本，以爱育人的教育理念指导下，把育人放在第一位，关爱后进生。树立新的教育理念，确实抓好教学。在教学中，我们把落实新课改，推进课程改革放在首位，因为新的课程标准颁布是基础教育的重大改革，对此，我组全体老师积极响应付诸实施。我们认真思考，积极讨论，制定出课改具体计划。我们通过相互观摩课、看录像等形式加强“课改”理论学习，提高自身的素质。

二、规范教学管理，进一步提高教学质量

教学中，备课是一个必不可少，十分重要的环节，备学生，又要备教法。备课不充分或者备得不好，会严重影响课堂气氛和积极性，一堂准备充分的课，会令学生和老师都获益不浅。教学难度比较大的课，如果照本宣科地讲授，学生会感到困难和沉闷。为了上好每堂课，我们每位老师认真研究探讨，找出了重点，难点。

三、关爱每个学生，缩小两极分化

因为英语的特殊情况，学生在不断学习中，会出现好差分化现象，差生面扩大，会严重影响班内的学习风气。因此，绝对不能忽视。为此，我们制定了具体的计划和目标。对这部分同学进行有计划的辅导。

四、按照教学常规五个环节开展教学工作

备课：课前认真地备好每一节课，写好教案。既备教材，又备学生，针对学生分析、概括、表达能力差的特点，设计好教学方法。上课：每天都保持饱满的精神，让学生感受到一种自然气氛，认真做好组织教学，尽可能保证上课内容丰富，现实，教态自然，讲课生动，难易适中照顾全部，并且充分调动学生的学习积极性，设法令学生投入，不让其分心，让学生多动手，多动口、，多动脑，让课堂气氛活跃起来，充分调动学生的主观

能动性，力图让学生学有所得，学有所乐。作业和辅导：作业的布置适量，有针对性，重点放在遣词造句、阅读理解等;批改作业时多用赞美式、鼓励性的语言予以评价。对学生的辅导方面，做到有耐心，有方法，因材施教，个别无心思学的学生，经过一个学期的耐心教育，学习兴趣明显提高，成绩也有较大的进步。考试：本学期进行了多次阶段性的考试。每次的考试，都能做到考试前进行有系统的复习，考试后进行学科总结，及时查漏补缺，从中改正教学方法，也让学生调整学习方法，争取更大的进步。

五、其他方面

1、把握教学进度，合理安排时间，统一教学进度，顺利完成了本学期的教学任务。

2、认真辅导、组织学生参加了本学期举行的英语竞赛活动，并且取得了优异成绩。王梦涵同学和张宇熠同学在区英语口语比赛中获得一等奖。

3、为了加强自身的业务水平，积极对各种教育理论进行学习，给自己充电，以便在工作中以坚实的理论作为指导，更好地进行教育教学;努力提高英语专业水平，以适应当前教育的形式，为更好地进行素质教育夯实基础，撰写出较有质量的教育教学论文并进行各种课题的研究。

六、今后采取的措施

从今年网上阅卷的情况来看，可以检测老师的水平，也能了解学生在各方面的不足之处。在以后的教学中，加强学生们的书写，审题把握中心，并且在写作运用上加大力度。

#380450

人教版新目标英语八年级上册教案篇2

本学期我担任初三级(1)班、(2)班的英语教学。由于教学经验颇浅，我对教学工作不敢怠慢，认真学习，深入研究教法，虚心学习。经过一个学期的努力，获取了很多宝贵的教学经验。以下是我在本学期的教学情况。

一、备好课，备好学生，上好课

教学就是教与学，两者是相互联系，不可分割的，有教者就必然有学者。学生是被教的主体。因此，了解和分析学生情况，有针对地教对教学成功与否至关重要。不懂得了解学生对教学的重要性，只是专心研究书本，教材，想方设法令课堂生动，学生易接受，这是很容易碰钉子的。在上课前要了解清楚学生的实际情况：

一方面，农村的学生英语听，说的能力相对较弱，授课采用较深的全英教学，同学们较难适应。另一方面，(1)班的同学比较沉静，中等生占较大多数，尖子生相对较少。因此，讲得太深，就照顾不到整体，而(2)班的同学比较活跃，上课气氛积极，虽然优生比例大，但中等生也有一小部分，我备课时也注意到这点，因此教学效果比较理想。从此可以看出，了解及分析学生实际情况，实事求是，具体问题具体分析，做到因材施教，对授课效果有直接影响。这就是教育学中提到的“备教法的同时要备学生”。这一理论在我的教学实践中得到了验证。

教学中，备课是一个必不可少，十分重要的环节，备学生，又要备教法。备课不充分或者备得不好，会严重影响课堂气氛和积极性，因此，每天我都花费大量的时间在备课之上，认认真真钻研教材和教法，不满意就不收工。虽然辛苦，但事实证明是值得的。

一堂准备充分的课，会令学生和老师都获益不浅。我认真研究了课文，找出了重点，难点，准备有针对性地讲。为使教学生动，不沉闷，我还为此准备了大量的教具，授课时就胸有成竹了。相反，我没有认真备课的时候，课堂气氛沉闷，教学效果不好，与此相比可见，认真备课对教学十分重要。特别是对英语这门学生不甚熟悉并感到困难的外语来说至关重要。

备课充分，能调动学生的积极性，上课效果就好。但同时又要有驾驭课堂的能力，因为学生在课堂上的一举一动都会直接影响课堂教学。因此上课一定要设法令学生投入，不让其分心，这就很讲究方法了。上课内容丰富，现实。教态自然，讲课生动，难易适中照顾全部，就自然能够吸引住学生。所以，老师每天都要有充足的精神，让学生感受到一种自然气氛。这样，授课就事半功倍。

二、激发学生学习兴趣

英语是一门外语，对学生而言，既生疏又困难，在这样一种大环境之下，要教好英语，就要让学生喜爱英语，让他们对英语产生兴趣。否则学生对这门学科产生畏难情绪，不愿学，也无法学下去。为此，我采取了一些方法，就是尽量多讲一些关于英美国家的文化，生活故事，让他们更了解英语，更喜欢学习英语。因为只有英语水平提高，他们才能达到交异国笔友的目的，同时也可以提高同学们的英语写作能力，对成绩优秀的同学很有好处。因为英语的特殊情况，学生在不断学习中，会出现好差分化现象，差生面扩大，会严重影响班内的学习风气。因此，绝对不能忽视。为此，我制定了具体的计划和目标。对这部分同学进行有计划的辅导。

三、注重听、说、读、写全面发展

英语是语言。因此，除了课堂效果之外，还需要让学生多读，多讲，多练。为此，在早读时，我坚持下班了解早读情况，发现问题及时纠正。课后发现学生作业问题也及时解决，及时讲清楚，让学生即时消化。另外，对部分不自觉的同学还采取强硬背诵等方式，提高他们的能力。期中考和期末考是考察每位同学在本学期的学习成果，因此应该予以重视。考试前进行有系统的复习，考试后进行学科总结。在中段考后的时间里，我把力量主要集中在两班的差生辅导上，特别是(4)班，以缩短差距。另外，还发现学生的综合能力不够强，所以以后的教学中要加强这方面的训练。让学生轻松学，容易掌握。而期考结果证明，适当辅导后进生对班的整体发展有很大帮助。

经过一个学期的努力，期末考就是一种考验。无论成绩高低，都体现了我在这学期的教学成果。我明白到这并不是最重要的，重要的是在本学期后如何自我提高，如何共同提高两班的英语水平。因此，无论怎样辛苦，我都会继续努力，多问，多想，多向别人学习，争取进步。

#380976

人教版新目标英语八年级上册教案篇3

今年我担任毕业班两个班的英语，感到压力沉重。因为这两个班的学生素质相对较低，而且英语底子参差不齐，而九年级是整个初中阶段最重要一年，为使学生在英语这门学科上取得更大的进步，取得优异的成绩，我在教学中尝试了一些教学方法，现总结如下：

一、备课

教学中，备课是一个必不可少，十分重要的环节，既要备教材、备学生，又要备教法。备课充分，能调动学生的积极性，上课效果就好。

二、培养学生良好的英语学习习惯

我校的学生来源全是农村的，学生家长以及周围的环境对学习英语都不是很关注，而且大多是留守学生，学生的学习自觉性也较差，主要表现在以下几个方面：

1、不把背的作业当回事。学过的单词，句型，短文，老师要求背出，学生总是借口其他作业太多，没时间背等，往后一拖再拖，即便能背出来，也是临时死记强记出来的。等过不了多久又忘了。

2、针对性习题跟不上上过的新课，相应的配套练习，不能自觉去独立完成，总需要老师再三强调，但仍有部分学生拖拖拉拉不做。死记硬背的东西多，联系的东西少，因此表面上看感觉还可以，但真正一考起来，问题出来很多，而且差距很大。经过几次考试下来，问题也出来了，我任教的两个班：尖子生只有几个，中等生断层，差生面特大。

针对以上情况，改变这种局面，我从下面几个方面着手：

首先，培养学生良好的学习习惯，课前多预习，课堂45分钟让学生集中注意力听讲，把老师讲的内容真正听懂。不能似懂非懂。课后认真完成配套的巩固练习，不懂的地方，多向老师或成绩稍好的学生请教。

其次，学生学习要主次分明，主要学科课后时间分配相应的因当多一些，特别是对英语学科，因为他毕竟不是母语。基础不打好，以后想提高也难。

第三，灵活掌握学过的知识点，学习要讲究方法，举一反三，融会贯通，只有这样，学生才能把所学的知识串联起来，不容易忘记。要让学生明白，学习英语不是一天两天的事，是要靠平时慢慢积累起来的。

三、建设高效的课堂，努力提高驾驭课堂的能力

因为学生在课堂上的一举一动都会直接影响课堂教学，所以上课一定要设法吸引学生，不让其分心，上课内容力求丰富，现实。教态自然，讲课生动，难易适中照顾全部，就自然能够吸引住学生。另外，我每天都坚持保持充足的精神，让学生感受到一种积极上进的气氛。这样，授课就事半功倍。为了让学生真正参入到课堂中来，凡是学生自己能讲清楚的问题，都让学生自己解决，老师决不越俎代庖，课堂上尽量精讲、少讲把时间都留给学生。

四、加强课外辅导

英语学习是语言的学习。困此，除了课堂效果之外，还需要让学生多读，多讲，多练。为此，在早读时，我坚持认真了解早读情况，发现问题及时纠正。课后发现学生作业问题也及时解决，及时讲清楚，让学生即时消化。另外，对部分不自觉的同学还采取强制背诵等方式，帮助他们养成良好习惯，提高他们的英语学习能力。

以上就是我在本学期的教学工作总结，有成绩也有不足。今后我将继续努力，取得更好成绩.

#380975

人教版新目标英语八年级上册教案篇4

时光飞逝，短暂而又愉快的假期生活已经结束了。接下来我所面临的是紧张而又愉快的新学期的教育教学生活。为把新学期的教育教学工作做好，特此作如下教学计划：

一.指导思想。

“减负”的内在，并以此指导自己的教育教学工作，遵循教育教学规律，紧扣大纲，把我教学层次，不断提高自己的业务水平。

二.基本情况。

这一学期，我继续担任初一(1，2)班的英语教学工作。这两个班级，每班各有学生三十五人左右，但是，基础却不尽人意。初一.1班的学生基础还可以，但是2班的基础却相差很远，学生基础参差不齐，两极分化严重，没有学习的兴趣。因此，教学工作开展的相当困难。

三.教材特点。

初中英语第一册(下)主要介绍了日常生活的交际用语以及一些西方国家的文化背景和风俗习惯，教材通俗易懂，旨在使初一级学生基本能用英语进行简单的交流。

四.教学目标。

力争在期末考试中优秀率打到30%左右，及格率达到60%左右。缩小学生间的差距。为下一学期的英语教育教学工作打下以良好的基础。

五.具体措施。

1.每天背诵课文中的对话。目的：要求学生背诵并默写，培养语感。

2.每天记5个生词，2个常用句子或习语。实施：利用“互测及教师抽查”及时检查，保证效果并坚持下去。

3.认真贯彻晨读制度：规定晨读内容，加强监督，保证晨读效果。

4.坚持日测、周测、月测的形成性评价制度：对英语学习实行量化制度，每日、每周、每月都要给学生检验自己努力成果的机会，让进步的同学体会到成就感，让落后的同学找出差距，感受压力。由此在班里形成浓厚的学习氛围，培养学生健康向上的人格和竞争意识。

5.对后进生进行专门辅导，布置单独的作业，让他们在小进步、小转变中体味学习的快乐，树立学习的自信，尽快成长起来。

6.关注学生的情感，营造宽松、民主、和谐的教学氛围。

7.实施任务型的教学途径，培养学生综合语言运用能力。

8.在教学中根据目标并结合教学内容，创造性地设计贴近学生实际的教学活动，吸引和组织他们积极参与。学生通过思考、调查、讨论、交流和合作等方式，学习和使用英语，完成学习任务。

9.加强对学生学习策略的指导，为他们终身学习奠定基础。

10.认真钻研教材，备好，上好每一节课，向45分钟要质量。

总之，新的学期已经开始了，我要以上一学期的基础为起点，树立信心，全身心的投入到新学期的教育教学工作中去。争取在新的一年里，把教育教学工作推向一新的层次。

#277306

人教版新目标英语八年级上册教案篇5

本学期我担任初三级(10)班、(13)班的英语教学。本学期以来,本人遵守学校各项制度，按时上课、组织学生早读，积极参加学校组织的各种教学活动，从各方面更加严格要求自己，结合本校的实际条件和学生的实际情况，认真备课、听课，深入研究教法，虚心向老教师请教，及时反思教学，使教学有计划、有组织、有步骤地开展虚心学习。现对本学期以来的教学教育工作做以下总结，希望不断发扬优点，克服缺点，总结经验，吸取教训，使自己的教学工作更上一层楼。

一、认真制定教学计划，使教学有序地进行。在新课程改革精神和新的教学理念的灌溉下，我依照教学大纲、教材、学生实际和教育教学规律，制定了学期教学计划，规划好阶段计划，课时计划。在此基础上，设计好每一堂课。

二、认真备课。作为一名年轻教师，我的体会是，上好一堂课难，但备好一堂课更难。在备课之前，必须对所有内容进行熟悉，参考多方面的资料，认真深入钻研教材，确定重点难点，同时，备课不仅要备教材，而且要备教法，备教学手段，因此，本人在自身努力钻研教材和教法的基础上，积极配合搞好同年级老师的小组集体备课。

三、认真组织课堂教学。一堂课的四十五分钟，就是一个教师表演技能的阶段。上课时，本着“传道、授业、解惑”的原则，努力提高教学质量，使讲解有条理、清晰、准确、生动。使每堂课学生有所获，努力使学生打好基础，培养能力，发展智慧，培养学生的正确思维方式，养成良好的学习习惯。坚持做到以学生为主体，教师为主导，训练为主线。在课堂上，特别注意调动学生的积极性，加强师生交流，充分体现学生的主体作用，让学生学得容易，学得轻松，学得愉快。在课堂上，根据不同学生设计不同层次的问题，树立学生的自信心，让各层次的学生都得到提高。

四、虚心请教其他教师。教师的教学过程即是一个学习的过程。因此，在此过程中，一旦心中有疑，必会请教于同行。由于自己是一个教坛新手，缺乏经验，所以有许许多多的东西都须向其他教师学习。认真做到每月听课两节，做好听课记录，取之所长，克服所短。并常常与其他教师交流，改进教学方法。

五、认真批改作业。坚持布置适量的作业，使学生所学知识得到巩固和提高。布置作业时，坚持做到有针对性，有层次性，形式多样化。以此同时，提倡学生写英语周记，坚持每两周检查一次。每周布置听写任务，对所学新单词、新短语、好句子进行听写。认真及时地批改作业、作文、周记及听写。并针对学生的作业作文情况，认真透彻地进行讲评，根据其情况不断改进教法。

六、认真反思教学。教学这一活动，没有反思的伴随就不会有进步。坚持每次授课后，认真回想，进行反思。记录其教法、做法及操作不大理想的地方，虚心请教前来听课的领导及教师，及时做改进。并根据班级情况，分组教学，使组与组之间进行竞争学习。正所谓“有竞争才有动力”，坚持长期性评价原则，使学生在组中相互帮助，相互学习，培养团结互助的学习精神。

七、做好课后辅导工作。在课后，对不同的学生进行相应的辅导。从平时的课堂反应，课后交流，周记记录中掌握各个学生的心理状况，抓住他们的特点和个性，有的放矢地与其进行交流，做到按层次、按情况进行辅导。及时给予关怀和关爱。善于发现学生的优点，并给予表扬;积极发现后进生的闪光点，及时给予鼓励，树立他们的自信心。充分结合课本知识，给学生讲相关的英语故事，了解外国文化，扩大知识面。引导他们对学习萌发兴趣，从而自觉地把身心投入到学习中去。

总之，在这一学期的教学过程中，我尽力地做好每项工作。其中学到的东西固然不少，但不足之处也很多。在以后的教学工作中，我将不断总结经验，发扬优点，改进缺点，不断探索新的教学方法和教学手段，激发学生的学习兴趣和积极性，提高自己的教学质量，做一位合格的人民教师，让我这颗教坛上的新星更加耀眼!

#380977

人教版新目标英语八年级上册教案篇6

以“英语课程标准”为宗旨，适应新课程改革的需要，面向全体学生，提高学生的人文素养，增强实践能力和创新精神。正确把握英语学科特点，积极倡导合作探究的学习方式。培养学生积极地情感态度和正确的人生价值观，提高学生综合素质为学生全面发展和终身发展奠定基础。具体如下：

1、要面向全体学生，关注每个学生的情感，激发他们学习英语的兴趣，帮助他们建立学习的成就感和自信心,培养创新精神;

2、整体设计目标，体现灵活开放，目标设计以学生技能，语言知识，情感态度，学习策略和文化意识的发展为基础;

3、突出学生主体，尊重个体差异;

4、采用活动途径，倡导体验参与，即采用任务型的教学模式，让学生在老师的指导下通过感知、体验、实践、参与和合作等方式，实现任务的目标，感受成功;

5、注重过程评价，促进学生发展，建立能激励学生学习兴趣和自主学习能力发展的评价体系。

总之，让学生在使用英语中学习英语，让学生成为GoodUser而不仅仅是Learner。让英语成为学生学习生活中最实用的工具而非累赘，让他们在使用和学习英语的过程中，体味到轻松和成功的快乐，而不是无尽的担忧和恐惧。

二、全期教学总目标

学生应有较明确的英语学习动机和积极主动的学习态度。能听懂教师对有关熟悉话题的陈述并能参与讨论。能读供七至八年级学生阅读的简单读物和报纸杂志，克服生词障碍，理解大意。能根据阅读目的运用适当的阅读策略。能与他人合作，解决问题并报告结果，共同完成学习任务。能在学习中互相帮助，克服困难。能合理计划和安排学习任务，积极探索适合自己的学习方法。在学习和日常交际中能注意到中外文化的差异。

三.教材简要分析

《新课标英语》(冀教版)八年级(下册)，全书共有八个单元。本教材各单元话题灵活，贴近生活实际。本册书将学习的一些语法知识点有：一般将来时、过去进行时、现在完成时、间接引语、时间状语从句、条件状语从句、反意疑问句等。同时每个单元后都提供了一篇阅读文章，用以训练学生的阅读能力，扩大学生的阅读量。

四、学情简要分析

初二年级

5、6班，共有学生人数 人，其中男生人，女生人。通过初一年半的英语学习，大多数学生已能听懂有关熟悉话题的语段和简短的故事。能与教师或同学就熟悉的话题交换信息。能读懂短篇故事，能写便条和简单的书信。但由于各种因素的影响，学生发展参差不齐。有少数学生因为基础不够好，学习很吃力而自暴自弃，有的因此扰乱课堂次序，这给教学带来不少困难。

五、提高教学质量可行措施及教改措施：

(一)、面向全体学生，注重素质教育。

(二)、以学生为主体，尊重学生个体差异。

(三)、采用活动途径，倡导体验与参与。

(四)、开发课程资源，拓展学用渠道。

具体来说：

1.认真专研教材和课标，精心备课，认真上好每一堂课。确定每堂课的基础内容，预备内容和拓展内容，满足不同层次学生的不同需求。

2.充分利用现有的现代化教学设备，加强直观教学，提高课堂效率。

3.多与学生沟通，了解学生学习状况和需求，及时改进教学中存在的问题和不足。

4.积极开展丰富多彩的英语活动，提高学生兴趣。如英语演讲比赛、单词听写比赛、朗读 比赛、英语手抄报比赛、学唱英文歌曲，课前五分钟活动等。

5.注重个别辅导，在面向全体学生的基础上，培优补差。

6.不断学习，加强自身素质和业务能力的提高。

对于学生具体要求：

1. 每天背诵课文中的对话。目的：要求学生背诵并默写，培养语感。

2. 每天记5个生词，2个常用句子或习语。实施：利用“互测及教师抽查”及时检查，保证效果并坚持下去。

3. 认真贯彻晨读制度：规定晨读内容，加强监督，保证晨读效果。

4.坚持日测、周测、月测的形成性评价制度：对英语学习实行量化制度，每日、每周、每月都要给学生检验自己努力成果的机会，让进步的同学体会到成就感，让落后的同学找出差距，感受压力。由此在班里形成浓厚的学习氛围，培养学生健康向上的人格和竞争意识。

5. 对后进生进行专门辅导，布置单独的作业，让他们在小进步、小转变中体味学习的快乐，树立学习的自 信，尽快成长起来。

6. 关注学生的情感，营造宽松、民主、和谐的教学氛围。

7. 实施"任务型"的教学途径，培养学生综合语言运用能力

8.在教学中根据目标并结合教学内容，创造性地设计贴近学生实际的教学活动，吸引和组织他们积极参与。学生通过思考、调查、讨论、交流和合作等方式，学习和使用英语，完成学习任务。

#277307

人教版八年级英语课件 篇9

第一单元 相亲相爱一家人

第一课 爱在屋檐下

第一框：我知我家

教学目标

情感、态度、价值观目标：爱自己的家、热爱父母的情感和厌恶不孝行经的情感。

能力目标：认识自己家庭的能力。

知识目标：了解家庭的一般概况;家庭关系的确立;子女与父母的关系不可选择;了解父母的特点;家人的优秀品质。

重点与难点：子女与父母的关系不可选择

教学准备

和父母一起回忆在你们的家庭生活经历中，印象最深的一件事(如生病、惹祸、比赛成功等)是什么?父母当时是怎么做的?

教学过程

[导语]有了泥土，嫩芽才会长大;有了阳光，春芽才会开花;我们每个人的成长都离不开我们的家。当我们还在妈妈肚子里的时候，爱我们的爸爸、妈妈、爷爷、奶奶就开始为我们绘制宏伟的蓝图，编制美丽的理想甚至为我们早早起好了名字。

有没有同学愿意为大家介绍一下你们名字的含义呀?(请2—3名同学介绍。)

一、“什么是家呢?”

简简单单的名字，寄予了家长深切的爱。我们从出生那一刻起，就被家的温暖所包围。

[情景故事]教材P4两则故事说：“那……不是我的房子” “我又有家了”。那么“家到底是什么?”

二、体验活动： “家”的遐想 /我眼中到的家。(并请说明理由)

[小结]家是温暖的避风港;是一片蓝天;是一把伞……

三、“画”家

A 爸爸、妈妈、哥哥、小松

b 爷爷、奶奶、爸爸、妈妈、小兰

c 爸爸、小刚

d 爸爸、妈妈、小浩、叔叔、婶婶

——我们有不同的家庭结构：大致有核心家庭，主干家庭，单亲家庭，联合家庭等。

[知识拓展]家庭是有婚姻关系、血缘关系或收养关系结合成的亲属生活组织。家里有亲人，家中有亲情。家庭关系的确立也有多种情形，依照法定条件和程序结婚组成的新家庭;因生育导致的血缘关系结合的家庭;依照法定条件和程序收养而组成的家庭;随父母再婚组成的新家庭。不同的家庭关系，促成了不同的家庭结构。

——父母赚钱不容易：为了撑起一个幸福、温馨的家庭，爸爸妈妈努力工作。你知道爸爸妈妈具体从事的工作吗?他们工作中有什么困难和委屈吗?他们回家后还要干什么?

——父母养育我们不容易：爸爸妈妈为了我们，一方面努力工作，一方面对我们的成长无时不刻倾注着他们对儿女的爱。你能说说爸爸妈妈在你成长道路上付出的爱吗?

四、实话实说：喜欢“选择什么样的父母”?

A、小冰早就想买一个新款MP3了，妈妈说家庭经济不宽余，一定要买的话就看期末考试有没有进步。

B、小亮是一个很调皮的男生，这次在学校不小心打破一块玻璃，要赔偿人民币15元。可是小他的父母刚听了一个开头，便不高兴了，拿起皮鞭打了他一顿。

C、小宁生活在一个十分优越的家庭。怕起早，每天爸爸开车送她去学校;嫌菜差，每天保姆送饭来学校;穿的是名牌，用的是精品;妈妈还告诉她学校的值周劳动最好不要参加。

D、……

五、小结：父母给予我们生命，这种天然生成的最自然的亲情，是无法选择、无法改变的。

六、作业：介绍我家的好品质、好家风。

第二框：我爱我家(一课时)

知识目标：体会家庭中亲情的温暖，明白抚养和教育子女是父母的道德和法律义务，而父母也理应受到子女的孝敬。

能力目标：辨证看待家庭中父母与子女权利义务关系的能力;收集父母为家庭作贡献的具体事例的能力，感受家庭亲情的能力。

情感态度和价值观目标：感受父母对自己的爱心和抚育，尊重父母的劳动和情感，培养学生权利与义务的意识，承担起自己的对家庭的责任。

教学重点：感受家庭的温暖。

教学难点：担负起自己的责任，与家人一起营造温馨的家。

教学过程：

【新课导入】

在一个小生命还酝酿在母体的时候，已经倾注了家人对他的关爱，那就是他的名字。请学生说说他们的名字的用意。以此来体会家人的期待和关爱。

一.爱的回忆

活动内容：先让学生回忆小时候受父母呵护的甜蜜时光，并把自己的童趣讲给同学听。再设问：在你的家庭中，有没有发生过令你感动的事?

设计意图：这一活动的目的在于让学生通过回忆，感受家庭的温馨，感受父母对自己的呵护。

教师行为：开展这一活动，一要注意正面引导，防止学生讨论亲子矛盾，而要着重引导学生感受父母的爱;二要注意辨证地看待这些事，因为许多家长对子女爱护有余，严格要求不足，所以要对学生反映出来的问题作具体分析。

二.无悔的爱

活动内容：让学生填写表格，即“在你家，下列事情通常由谁来做?”另外，讨论两个问题：“说说自己家中贡献最大的人是谁，要说出具体理由”和“夸夸自己的父母，并讲给同学听”。

教师行为：指导学生开展这一活动，一要让学生根据家庭情况如实填写，通过填写体会父母的贡献;二要引导学生在家做力所能及的事，渗透在家尽责的教育;三是说说家人的贡献，包括物质方面的，也包括良好道德、优秀思想方面的精神贡献;四是找父母的优点，夸夸自己的父母。

教学建议：开展这一活动，可以不限于教材表格中所列的项目，由学生根据实际情况填写。家中的事，凡学生能做的，要鼓励学生做，这既能培养学生能力，又能陶冶学生情操，而且有助于增进学生与父母的亲情，与父母更好地沟通。在学生的讨论中，可以讲“大”的事情，也可以讲感人的具体事例，有些小事反而更能体现父母的一片苦心，容易感动人。在活动中，要注意家庭有缺陷的学生的反应，防止伤害这些学生。

三.爱的低诉：

活动内容：给学生足够的时间写一段他对母爱或父爱的认识，交流自己对这种爱曾经的误会或曾经的感动。

教师行为：呈现两个关于母亲的故事(见附录)，并引导学生用心感悟他对母爱或父爱的认识，并将优秀作品展示给全班同学。

设计意图：这一活动意在让学生体会原来未曾注意的东西，也是丰富学生情感、促进其良知发展的重要环节。有的老师说，现在的学生不知感恩，不被感动，认为父母对自己所做的一切都是理所当然的。原因之一是我们的教育忽略了学生的体验，缺乏正确有效的引导。有的学生对家长不满甚至看不起父母，也与他们缺乏对父母的理解，不会感受或感受不到亲情呵护有关。因此，要通过这一活动，让同龄人自己教育自己，在轻松的氛围中深切感悟在家庭中获得的爱。

教学建议：开展这一活动，老师要善于引导，可以用具体事例来启发;要注意以情感人，烘托出良好氛围;不必面面俱到，只要发动学生积极地说、积极地体验就行了;要有意识地从父母的良苦用心、子女的责任两个方面来启发，突出正面教育的效果。如果有学生从反面冲突来讲，要注意剖析分析的本意和期望，剖析其中所蕴涵的爱，把学生引导到爱父母、爱家庭上来。

四.爱的告白：

活动内容：让学生给父母写寄言，即在感激父母抚育、理解父母心情的基础上，写几句话并交给父母，表达自己对父母的心情。

设计意图：设计这一活动，在于让学生与父母心灵碰撞，表达自己对父母的感激之情，表达自己对父母的责任和决心。

教师行为：指导学生开展这一活动，第一步，可以让学生写父母的优点长处，也可以让学生写父母对自己的呵护和期望，还可以让学生写自己的感受和决心。第二步，在同学中互相交流，互相感染启发。第三步，把自己所写的交给父母，与父母沟通互动。

教学建议：在这一活动中，要注意展示学生的才气，如让他们写诗歌、散文等形式来写。要强调写出自己的情感体验，避免说空话，避免应付。要注意引导学生把情感和意志结合起来，即要把自己的决心和打算反映出来。这件事是一个学生与家长的互动过程，要注意发挥家长的作用，如将学生的感受反馈给家长，有条件的可以让家长也给学生写寄言，在互动中加强对学生的教育。

五.爱的成长：

活动内容：讨论：当你们的父母发生了矛盾，你是怎样做的?若父母一方或双方下岗怎么办?为了使你的家庭更美满，你还应做些什么?

设计意图：引导学生体验温馨的家庭需要全家人的齐心协力。

第三框：难报三春晖(一课时)

知识目标：孝敬父母长辈是中华民族的传统美德;不孝敬父母长辈要受道德的谴责，要承担法律责任;孝敬父母长辈体现在日常生活的方方面面。

能力目标：辨证分析孝敬父母好处与不孝之坏处的能力，辨别具体行为是否属于孝的能力;孝亲敬长的具体行为实践能力。

情感态度和价值观目标：厌恶不孝行径的情感;体验尽孝后的快乐;树立家庭中的正确的是非观念，增强履行家庭义务的责任观念。

教学重点：如何孝敬父母。

教学难点：孝敬父母的道德和法律基础，防止愚孝。

教学过程：

一.爱洒心间

活动内容：出示材料：一封别样的信(见附录)，引导思考：你能读懂母亲这样做的良苦用心吗?

设计意图：一是设置悬念，激发兴趣;二是与教材中的故事有异曲同工之效。

教师行为：引导相互交流并分享自己感受到的父母的爱。

二.爱的回报

活动内容：小组竞赛，孝亲故事知多少?

设计意图：引导学生从“孝亲”的典例中感受榜样的力量，为自己“孝亲”行为提供借鉴。

活动内容：讨论：“你平时是怎样孝敬父母的?你认为孝敬父母应该表现在哪些方面?”“把自己尽孝后的感受谈出来与大家分享。”

设计意图：让学生交流自己孝敬父母的做法和收获，达到同龄人互相教育、启发、感染的效果。

活动内容：讨论，遇到下列情形该怎么办：

⑴父母只要我读好书，我该怎么办?

⑵父母不让我做家务，该怎么办?

⑶外出时应对父母说什么?

⑷父母生病了，该怎么办?

⑸当父母劳累一天下班回家，我该做些什么?

⑹当父母烦恼时，我该怎么做?

⑺作业未完成被老师留下来而迟归，我该怎么面对父母?

⑻成绩没考时，该如何面对父母?

⑼我想买电脑，父母认为我控制能力不强而不赞成，我该怎么办?

⑽朋友来访，但父母不喜欢，该怎么做?

设计意图：设计这一活动，主要目的在于让学生把孝敬父母落实到自己的实际行动上。孝敬父母表现于日常生活的各个方面，甚至在与父母交往的任何活动中，都有孝与不孝的问题。通过这一活动，可以把学生孝敬父母的心意、表现与行为选择结合起来，提高教育的实效性。

教学建议：指导学生开展这一活动，可以就教材所给材料进行讨论，通过分析、选择来判断是与非，进而明确应该如何对待父母。需要说明的是，这些题目都是开放性的，有许多可以辨析之处，关键是帮助学生树立为父母着想的观念，找出孝与不孝的出发点的不同。比如，成绩要不要告诉父母，本身很复杂。就学生的权利而言，不告诉并不一定错。但如果从爱父母、孝敬父母出发，可以用不同的方式与父母沟通，这对学生自己也有利。如果从怕批评、防父母出发，与父母有情感上的隔阂，就处理不好这件事。中国有句古话“百事孝为先，论心不论事，论事无孝子”。

教师行为：指导学生开展这一活动，首先要表扬孝敬父母的好人好事。如果老师知道一些，也可以先表扬，再引导学生自己谈。其次，让学生谈自己孝敬父母的具体做法，并注意将孝的各个方面的表现予以归类。再次，让学生谈尽孝后的感受。尽孝需要付出，但得到的是甜蜜。让学生在比较中选择孝行，是把教育落到实处的最好策略。也就是说，这种道德规范不是由外界强加的，而是学生自己的主动选择。

三.爱的反思：

活动内容：仔细阅读漫画，回答下列问题：图中“孝子”的言行反映了什么现象?你对此持什么态度?为什么?日常生活中你是否也有过类似的行为?如果有，你将如何改进?

教师行为：引导学生思考：自己曾有过不善待父母的事吗?你当时是怎么想的?发生了怎样的后果?现在你对这件事又是怎样想的?如果你当时按你现在的想法去做，设想一下结果又会是怎样?这一活动先在小组内交流，然后再进行全班交流。

设计意图：这个活动主要通过学生的回忆和反省，来体会父母对子女深沉、无私的爱，同时，意识到自己对父母付出太少，从而增强同学的责任意识，和为父母、为家庭付出的主动意识。

四.爱的传递

教师行为：引导学生回忆2004年春节联欢晚会小品“粮票的故事”。

设计意图：体验孝敬父母不仅是物质上的扶助，更应是精神上的关爱;不仅要孝敬我们的父母，还应孝敬爷爷奶奶、外公外婆等长辈，及至“老吾老，以及人之老”。

第二课 我与父母交朋友

第一框 严也是一种爱(两课时)

知识目标：通过案例的分析讨论及活动的体验探究，帮助学生认识什么是代沟，代沟的表现和形成原因，引导学生认识到逆反心理的危害，同时让学生明白通过亲子双方的努力，代沟是可以填平的。

能力目标：培养学生正确认识自己的自知能力和正确理解家长心情的知人能力;对代沟产生的原因的分析能力;对逆反心理的辨证分析能力，增强促进自我成长的责任意识。

情感态度和价值观目标：对父母亲人的爱;对自己正确行为的赞赏，对错误行为的后悔和耻辱;体会父母对自己的心情和期待，正确对待父母教育的情感;坚持正确的看法和行为，丢掉不良思想行为的态度。

教学重点：正确看待父母对自己的关爱和教育。

教学难点：代沟的产生及逆反心理的危害。

第一课时 成长也会有烦恼

课前准备：课前先通过班主任了解班级学生基本的家庭关系，记录特殊家庭的学生、与父母关系紧张的学生等，以便在活动中给予更多的关注。同时还可以记录家庭关系良好的学生，以便于有意识地让他们在活动中充分发挥作用，给其他同学提供好的建议。

教学过程

一、成长的烦恼

1.同龄人的心声(见附录)

活动内容：引导思考，同学们有过类似的烦恼吗?请举几例。为什么原来和谐亲密的亲子关系，现在变得格格不入?

设计意图：设置学生身边发生的事件场景，勾勒出“生活画面”，以增强学生的认同感。同时对同伴的了解有助于学生纠正认知偏差，缓解心理压力。如一些学生可能本来对自己的亲子关系很不满意，但他可能抱怨自己父亲不好。通过这一了解发现很多人也跟他差不多，知道这种现象是青春期孩子的共性，他对父母的不满情绪就会降低。

教师行为：指导学生开展这一活动，可以先让学生认可教材上的材料，即学生身边的事，是经常发生的事，是每个学生都可能遇到的事。然后可以让学生补充相近的材料，意在让学生参与，介入到现实生活情景之中。再让学生讨论分析原因，从中体会父母的期望、立场、态度、心思，通过这些分析体会父母的爱。最后，让学生思考解决这些问题的办法，这样可以让学生自己教育自己。

教学建议：开展这一活动，重在发挥其导向的功能，并不是要通过这一活动解决全部问题，因而要注意达成有限目标，要在努力方向上引导。要注意让学生站在不同立场上思考问题，即会与父母换位思考，尤其要注意引导学生体会父母严要求中蕴涵的爱心和期待。

2.苦恼的不只是我们(见附录：一份杂志上的两封信)

活动内容：分析成长中为什么会产生这些烦恼?通过比较两代人的不同，分析造成隔阂的原因。

设计意图：设计这一活动，首先在于让学生站在父母的角度看问题，这样对父母的正确做法更容易接受，不当之处也更容易理解和宽容。其次，通过比较，让学生对自己有个再认识。青春期的初中学生容易走极端，看问题容易片面。通过这一活动，可以帮助学生审视自己，从自己方面找原因，促进心理的成熟和处事方法的掌握。还有，比较方法是学生认识事物的重要方法，这一活动可以让学生在探究中获得终身受益的方法，以增强其能力。

教师行为：第一步，让学生分析，找出与父母的差别;第二步，探讨这些差别会造成哪些交往中的障碍;第三步，让学生评价矛盾的性质(爱与期待中的矛盾)，不能夸大这些矛盾;第四步，体会矛盾之中包含的父母的爱心和期待。鉴于比较两代人涉及许多内容，先为学生提供可比较的角度：

教学建议：开展这一活动，老师需要把握好度，即不能搞得太宽太多，因为这只是思想品德课教学的铺垫，而不是教学的重点。二是要渗透辨证观点的教育，即比较中分析并全面地看问题，分别看到两代人的利与弊。三是注意引导学生理解父母对子女的心情。这是体谅父母苦心的关键，也是我们对学生进行思想品德教育的重点。

二、成长不烦恼：

1.阅读感悟：其实你只有8%的烦恼

出示材料：有人做了这样一个心理学实验：要求实验者把未来7天所预料的烦恼事情写下来，投入“烦恼箱”。在过后第三周，打开“烦恼箱”，每个人核对“烦恼箱”的每项烦恼，结果发现其中九成的烦恼没有发生。他们把剩下的一成烦恼仍然留在“烦恼箱”里，过了三周，再拿出来核对，结果发现，那些烦恼已经不成为烦恼了。结论：一般人的忧虑40%属于过去，50%属于未来，只有10%属于现在。92%的忧虑没有发生，剩下8%是你可以轻易应付的。

设计意图：引导学生认识不必因亲子关系出现裂痕而过于忧虑。

2.质疑交流：订立一份《家庭和约》

出示材料：最近，华华在自己的卧室门上挂上了“请勿打扰”的牌子，让妈妈百思不得其解：“是自己做错了什么?还是孩子已经独立到非要挂牌子的地步?”爸爸也难过地说：“自从挂了那块牌子，我觉得好好的家就像旅馆似的。”但华华却不以为然。

教师行为：引导学生讨论：父母为什么为难过?你对此怎么看待?如果是你遇到这种情况，你会怎么办?如果与父母共同制定一个家庭规则并遵照家庭规则去做，结果可能会怎么样?并引导学生自拟提纲，与父母订立一份《家庭合约》。

3.身体力行：预防父母“唠叨”的招数

参照下面“预防父母‘唠叨’的招数”，指导学生将其运用于实践。

学习方面：赶前不赶后，完成了作业，父母唠叨自然少了。

仪表方面：如果你对奇装异服感兴趣，那肯定在父母干涉之列，此类的尽量避免。

社交方面：社交本来是你的自由，但别忘了父母还是你的法定监护人。所以，重要的是让他们知道，你在哪里，干什么，和谁在一起?出门前说得越详细越好，最好把联系电话留下，大多数父母即使知道孩子的派对地址，也不会到现场来“捉拿”你的。

卫生方面：起床叠被子，保持房间整洁，也是许多父母希望孩子养成的好习惯，如果你不讲究这一套，就不让他们看见，更不要让他们插手打扫啦(否则更有话唠叨你了)。适当的时候，来起早起，把自己的房间好好打扫一番，也捎带打扫一下家里的其他房间，这会让你的父母欣喜不已。

课前准备：

本课内容浅显，不涉及更多伦理，主要是情感和实践问题。要提高本课的教育实效，首先要在课前调查了解自己的学生，以加强教育的针对性和主动性。具体包括以下几个方面：①学生的现实生活中，哪些事容易引起与家长的冲突。②学生在化解与家长的冲突，有哪些成功的经验。③学生在与家长的关系中，还存在哪些主要问题。④学生逆反心理在家庭关系中的反映。⑤能够感染学生的例子，特别是在时间和空间上与学生接近的例子。

教学过程：

一.阅读感悟——爱的冲突(见附录)

活动内容：引导思考：你是否也经历过“爱的冲突”?试举一例。仔细体会材料，是爸爸妈妈不爱我们吗?还是他们不知道怎样表达爱?会不会是他们已经表达了而我们却未察觉?代沟，究竟谁不理解谁?是爸爸妈妈不理解我们，还是我们不理解爸爸妈妈?

设计意图：通过阅读和回忆自身心灵深处的感动和故事，让学生读懂父母的真诚与无私，为后面引导学生从自身角度分析逆反心理的危害作铺垫。

二.理性分析——冲突的代价

活动内容：连续性提问：你当时是怎样想的?最终结果怎样?这个结果对你日后的学习和生活与影响吗?如果有，请具体说明。现在你对这件事是怎样想的?如果你当时按你现在的想法去做，设想一下结果又会是怎样?你认为代沟产生的责任主要在于谁，为什么?

设计意图：意在让学生体会家庭冲突的不快，体会逆反心理造成的影响亲子关系、伤害父母和自己等危害，认识到逆反心理所存在的不利的一面。这样能让学生理智地对待与家长的矛盾，不任性，会控制自己的不良情绪。

教师行为：指导学生开展这一活动，主要让学生结合自己的经历谈感受，通过体验明辨是非，以便在今后的生活中作出正确的行为选择。因为冲突的解决有正面和反面两种体验。所以要引导学生从两个方面来谈，既可以讲正面的经验，也可以讲反面的教训。

教学建议：在活动中，要注意以下几点：引导学生讨论;注意保护学生的隐私;事件本身的介绍不必过细，核心在于让学生体验;要注意学生思想的升华，即理性地看待处理问题的不同结果;可以在学生讨论的基础上对危害进行梳理，如情感伤害、经济损失、阻碍家庭和个人发展等。

三.认真聆听——来自父母的心声

活动内容：出示材料：《孩子，我为什么会打你》(见附录)。引导思考：你也有过挨打的经历吗?当时心里是怎么想的?现在如何看待这种经历?采访自己的父母，问问他们当时是怎么想的?看了这篇文章你有什么感想?

教师行为：引导学生感受逆反心理导致的对父母的反抗，其结果都是惩罚了自己：不是拿自己的错误惩罚自己，就是拿父母的错误惩罚自己。这种结果也是对父母的一种伤害：不是拿自己的错误伤害父母，就是拿家长的错误伤害父母。同时帮助学生认识到父母对孩子的爱是出自本能的，是最无私的，只不过在现实生活中，有些父母表达爱的方式令孩子们不太喜欢罢了。但这也不足以导致某些孩子过激的方式来“回报”亲人。

四.出谋划策——面对生活中的烦恼

活动内容：就下列问题进行讨论交流：

①爸爸说写完作业就让我出去玩。我写完作业，妈妈又让我再做两道奥赛题……②妈妈说只要我期末考到班级前三名，就带我去旅游。我真的考了第二名，妈妈却说她没有时间……引导讨论：如果父母“说话不算数”，我们应该怎么办?

①妈妈非要我学钢琴，我一点都不喜欢，我的志向是当一个科学家。②妈妈很支持我，同意我学画画，可是现在我对它的前景不看好。③爸爸就知道让我学习，当尖子生，可我总是考不到第一，失望极了。引导讨论：如果父母的期望与你的愿望不一致，你是坚持己见还是服从父母的意志?你会如何说服父母来支持你的愿望?

①父母偷看了我的日记;②父母将我的朋友拒之门外。引导讨论：当父母的做法“不合理”时，你会怎么做?父母这样做的用意何在?建议：可结合教材中的阅读材料。

①一个同学说：我妈就是烦，每天我吃早饭的时候，她就说：“吃完早饭去喝牛奶，别忘了。”其实，牛奶和书包都放在我的写字台上，我上学拿书包，不就看见牛奶了吗?真是的!②女儿晚上去看电影，九点多回家。妈妈说：“才回来，我到路上都看了好几次了。”女儿说：“妈妈真是的，难道看看就能把我看回来?”③我骑自行车上学，爸妈每次都要叮咛一句：“路上小心，注意安全。”引导讨论：父母讲这些话的真正用意是什么?面对父母的唠叨，怎样做才会双赢?这里重在引导学生领悟同样一句话可以有多种意思的理解，即锣鼓听音，说话听声。

设计意图：选取这些两难问题，当然这些都是青少年学生所关心的、跟他们的成长密切相关的话题，让不同的价值观念相互碰撞，激起个体的内心价值冲突。让学生自主探究增进与父母的了解与沟通、化解冲突的办法，并让学生设想不同的方法可能带来的后果，让学生体会不同的态度、不同的沟通方式和处理方法所带来的结果是不同的。

第二框 两代人的对话(一课时)

知识目标：与父母沟通的过程;与父母沟通的基本要领;与父母交往的主要策略;以宽大胸怀和积极的态度与父母交往，不必非争高下不可。

能力目标：会与父母沟通商量的能力;对多种可能解决问题的方式进行选择的能力;把握与父母交往的诸多策略的应用能力;家庭交往中得失利弊的权衡能力。

情感态度和价值观目标：对父母的尊重，对自己人格的维护;崇尚与父母的平等，与父母共同遵守道德和法律准则;提高与父母沟通、解决问题的主动性;增强学生的责任意识和为家庭付出的主动意识。

教学重难点：

引导学生学会与父母进行沟通，彼此袒露内心世界，进而达到相互理解进行沟通的正确方法，并学习双赢的沟通策略。这既是本课的重点，也是本课的难点。

课前准备

对模拟表演先作出布置。这个模拟扮演活动，意在帮助学生正确地与父母沟通，要考虑多种因素和可能，正确解决与父母的矛盾。要把剧情让学生看仔细，让学生设计可能遇到的种种情形，最后找出双方可以接受的办法。应该给学生提出要求，在准备扮演活动中整理自己的经验和方法。

教学过程

一、借我一双慧眼——正确看待与父母的冲突

活动内容：根据书上的两个观点“家不是说理的地方。俗话说得好，清官难断家务事”和“家是爱的港湾，因为家里的矛盾易产生、也易解决，关键看我们怎么对待”进行讨论。

设计意图：引导学生正确认识家庭矛盾，因为夸大与父母的矛盾，会在处理家庭关系时有抵触情绪，妨碍沟通;看不到矛盾，会不在意解决与父母的矛盾，也不利于矛盾的解决和学生的进步。

教师活动：先让学生发表自己的看法，然后由老师举个具体的例子设计教学情境，分析处理方法，接着让学生讲自己如何处理家庭矛盾，最终得出有必要、有办法解决家庭矛盾的结论。当学生的争辩僵持不下的时候，老师要注意引导学生异中见同;当学生争辩趋同的时候，老师要引导学生同中见异。这样有助于提高学生认识问题和解决问题的能力。

教学建议：在活动中，要注意渗透辨证的观点，要注意引导学生更深入地思考。比如清官难断家务事，可以引导学生分析：家务事通常属于什么性质?是不是每件事只有一个答案?不同的观点和行为分别有什么合理的地方?如果站在对方的立场上来理解和思考，你会不会一定坚持自己的主见?在各有利弊的情况下，尊重别人的选择会带来什么好处?在自己有理的情况下，应不应得理不让人?可以不同意别人的做法，要不要尊重别人的选择?又如说明家中矛盾容易解决，要引导学生分析其中的原因，从父母爱子女、体谅子女的困难、期待子女更好等角度，论证自己的观点。讨论和争辩的过程，是道德学习的过程，也是学生体验的过程，对于掌握与家人交往的方法和艺术、提高教育实效有重大作用。

二、敢问路在何方——掌握与父母交往的方法

1.理解父母

阅读感悟：出示寓言故事：一把坚实的大锁挂在大门上，一根铁杆费了九牛二虎之力，还是无法将它撬开。钥匙来了，他瘦小的身子钻进锁孔，只轻轻一转，大锁就“啪”地一声打开了。

铁杆奇怪地问：“为什麽我费了那麽大力气也打不开，而你却轻而易举就把它打开了?”钥匙说：“因为我最了解他的心。” 设问：寓言给了我们什么启示?

设计意图：引导学生感悟到每个人的心，都像上了锁的大门，任你再粗的铁棒也撬不开。唯有理解，才是打开别人心锁的钥匙，与父母的交往亦如此。

案例分析：结合教材中小冰的例子，小冰冒火的理由是什么?爸爸的理由是什么?你的协调办法是什么?让学生选择A、干脆不去同学家了;B、按照家长的意思办，8点前到家;C、先斩后奏，写完作业、看完录像再回来。你还有什么好办法吗?

教师活动：指导学生开展这一活动，第一步可以引导学生思考处理这一问题的各种可能，并分析其利弊。比如：不到同学家做作业、看录象了，会导致对同学失信，自己也不满意，由此还会迁怒于家长;按家长的要求做，这保证了安全和休息，可未必有时间看录象，自己和同学都不能尽兴;不理家长的要求，写完作业、看完录象再回来，这会让家长担心、着急，说不定到现场亲自捉拿;与家长协商，双方都作些让步，可能双方都满意。第二步在分析各种可能、权衡各种利弊后，不同的学生会有不同的方法，这时可以对这些具体方法进行再剖析，在比较中选择最优方案。第三步，让学生把思考和解决这一问题的过程梳理一下，上升到一般方法论的高度，即引导学生善于与家长沟通，向本框教育目标靠拢。

教学建议：在活动中，要注意尊重学生的分析和选择，不应该预定某种解决问题的模式;鼓励学生大胆设想方案，分析利弊，正确选择;老师要有足够的准备，应对学生讨论中的难以预料的情况。当老师遇到没有把握回答或者难以驾驭的问题时，可以在鼓励学生的同时，将问题留待课下探究。

2.尊重父母

案例分析：母亲要到另一个城市去，临行前母亲问女儿：“回来我想给你买件衣服，可不知你喜欢什么样的?”女儿回答：“您只要把服装店里您瞧着最不顺眼的衣服买回来就行了。”引导讨论：为什么亲子间的价值观会有如此大的差异?这种差异还可能表现在生活中的哪些方面?会对家庭关系产生什么影响?对待这种差异是任之发展还是设法解决?如果你与父母的价值观不一致，你会怎么做?

阅读感悟：《珍珠与谷物》(见附录)

设计意图：重在引导学生领悟：珍珠和公鸡的价值观不同，是因为它们的需要不同。价值不是固有的，事物的价值在于使用者的需要。了解价值观取向是影响相互关系的一个重要原因，常言“话不投机半句多”。进而引导学生认识“多元价值观”存在是一个客观事实，父母和孩子的价值取向不同是正常的。

教学建议：可引导学生思考，自己哪些方面和父母价值观存在冲突?增进学生了解自己和父辈的价值取向差别的主要内容，如对服装的要求，父母在意便宜，宁可式样老一些;少年在意时尚，宁可质量差一些等。引导领悟亲子冲突不是父母变了，也不是自己变坏了，而是自己长大了。这一认识很重要，是积极沟通的前提。因为很多事情无所谓对错，如头发的长短等，仅仅是一种文化。亲子间的矛盾和冲突不一定干戈相见，它是可以通过良好的沟通和接纳多元价值观而缓解的。

3.认真聆听

活动内容：寻找父母与我们的共同点：问问父母，他们像你这么大的时候，他们最崇拜的人是谁?为什么?他们有些什么想法和愿望?他们的父母容许他们做什么，不容许他们做什么?他们是如何争取更多的自由和空间的……

设计意图：家长在回忆自己少年往事的时候，一般会很自豪地，不知不觉中放下家长的架子和孩子敞开心扉。这时，他们更容易理解孩子目前的经历和感受，认真考虑孩子独立的要求，甚至向孩子做出妥协和让步。从而引导学生发现原来爸爸妈妈有这么多与自己相似的行为特征，并把这种新感觉描述下来。

4.讲究艺术

出示材料：母亲在数落儿子，儿子一边看书一边聆听教诲。忽然儿子问母亲：“妈妈，一本内容枯燥冗长的书和说话罗嗦有什么区别?”母亲不假思索地回答：“你可以把书丢一边，可是却无法叫罗嗦的人闭嘴。”说完，母亲突然恍然大悟。“啊!你是在嫌我罗嗦呀!”母子俩都笑了。儿子用幽默的方法不仅提醒了习惯唠叨的母亲，而且自然地避免了母子之间的冲突。请出几个类似的金点子。

教师行为：在引导的时候，重点应提示学生“策略”内容并不重要，而且因人而异;重要的是当我们面对问题的时候，要学习思考什么是双赢的策略?要尽量避免“不满——冲突——冷战”这样的应对模式。

教学建议：要提示学生，没有标准答案，每个人的处境不一样，价值观取向不一样，对一个人是好的选择，对另一个人未必是好的。当没有“最好”即没有双赢时，要选择“更好”。

5.模拟沟通

活动内容：根据教材中小莉的例子模拟与家长沟通的过程。

设计意图：第二个活动侧重于探究处理冲突的步骤，这个活动侧重于让学生掌握与父母沟通的要领，不光有个步骤问题，更是情感交流的过程。沟通涉及的经验很多，核心是以爱的方式尊重父母，理解父母。

人教版八年级英语课件 篇10

Teaching Procedures

Pre-task

A. Greetings

Hello, everyone. I’m an English teacher from No. 4 Middle School. My name is Han Guili. You can call me Miss Han. Today I’m going to be your English teacher. We are going to learn Unit 10 Section B together. Now let’s begin our class. Stand up, please. Good morning, class. How are you today? I’m OK. Thank you. Sit down, please.

B. Explain “resolution” by listening to a song.

We all know New Year is coming. Today I have a gift for all of you.Do you like music? Great. Let’s enjoy it together. If you can sing it, you can follow it.(在听歌时教师板书课题Unit 10 I’m going to be a basketball player. Section B )

Do you like the gift ? I’m happy to hear that . I’m going to learn it next year and then I’m going to sing it for you. Do you like listening to me? This is my New Year’s resolution. “resolution” Are you clear? Follow me ,please. “resolution” From group 1to 6. “New Year’s Resolutions” From group 1to 6.(同时板书resolution New Year’s Resolutions)

（设计意图：通过新年礼物--周杰伦的歌曲“稻香”引出主题。歌曲具有时代气息，内容激励学生心存梦想并努力去实现它。）

Now let’s look at some New Year’s Resolutions. What are the meanings of the resolutions.

Discuss in groups. First translate and then read them. The others follow him or her.Go! Are you ready? Volunteer. （叫几名学生回答，学生领读时教师写板书instrument最后教师领读生词instrument）Now we have known the meanings of the resolutions. Please match the pictures with the resolutions. Answer it together. Let’s check the answer.

（设计意图：通过讨论翻译短语并由学生领读。这一环节可以培养学生们的自学能力和小组探究能力。同时也能提高学生的自信心。通过图片与短语的搭配有助于学生对短语的理解和记忆。）

C. Now let’s guess some famous people’s resolutions. Look! Who is it? What’s his resolution? Guess.（几名学生回答）Are they right? Let’s check the answer. Yes, they are right. Who can right it on the blackboard. Volunteer. (学生写板书时教师问)What is he going to do ? Answer it together.（这一步骤共五幅图片采用相同的方式训练学生）

（设计意图：这一环节趣味性强，对学生有吸引力。通过对名人决心的猜测，一方面增强了学生的好奇心和求知欲；另一方面也巩固了所学知识。同时也练习了对第三人称一般将来时的提问与回答。）

While-task

A. Now let’s use the resolutions to make conversations in pairs. For example, (Ask one student)What are you going to be when you grow up? What are you going to do next year ? Sounds interesting. I’m going to learn a foreign language.Are you clear? Go! Are you ready? The more pairs the better in a group. Volunteer. The last pair. Which group has the most pairs?（给获胜组贴一个笑脸） Come on boys and girls . Let’s learn from them.

（设计意图：通过这一对话练习，使学生能更熟练的掌握一般将来时的问与答，而且对话内容贴近实际生活。给获胜组贴一个笑脸，既鼓励了获胜组又激励了其他组。）

B. Let’s use the resolutions to make up a play. Look at some festivals here. Please choose one of them and then make up a play in groups.The group leader should say your choice. Go! Ready? Volunter. Which group is the best? I think you are all great.（给每一组贴一个笑脸）

（设计意图：小组合作编剧并表演出来。给每个学生展示的机会，使学生真正成为课堂的主体。给每组一个笑脸，既是对他们积极参与的表扬，又是对他们成绩的肯定。）

Let’s do some listening practice.Activity 2a. Let’s answer it together.Are you right? Let’s check the answer. Yes, you are great. Activity 2b. How are they going to do it ? Who can answer it? （叫几名学生回答）Are they right? Let’s check the answer. Yes, they are right. Who is right? Put up your hands. OK. Put down your hands. If you are not good at listening, please practice it after class.

（设计意图：通过听力练习可以考察学生对所学短语和句型的理解。2a听力部分较简单，适合总体检查。2b听力部分较难，可对学生答案进行抽查，再总体核对并进一步说明。）

Post-task

A. Now let’s have a PK in groups .Ask and answer one by one like this .(Ask one student )What are you going to do next year? This student answer it and ask the next one and go on .The fastest group is the winner. Go! Ready?Which group wants to be the first one? （用记时器为每一组记时）Which group is the fastest ?（给获胜组一个笑脸）Let’s learn from them.

（设计意图：这一活动可以锻炼学生的口语表达能力和提高说的流利程度，并增强集体合作意识和荣誉感。有竞争有趣味，学生都乐于参与。）

B. Discuss in groups. How to improve your English in the new year? The group leaders write down your answers and then report it for us.Go!Ready? Volunteer.（每组组长到前面来报告）

Great! I hope your resolutions can come true in the new year. A good plan is a good start to success. And where there is a will , there is a way. Let’s work hard togther, and get good grades. Come on , boys and girls.

（设计意图：通过对怎样提高英语的讨论，同学们之间都了解了各自的决心，并为之而努力。最后教师用恰当的谚语来鼓励学生并对学生进行情感教育。）

C. Sum up . What have you learned today?（先由学生总结最后教师总结）

（设计意图：锻炼学生的总结能力。）

D. Homework :Clean and Green

Imagine you work for your city . It’s your-job to make it cleaner. What are you going to do ? Think of a six-point plan.

（设计意图：使学生会运用所学知识。）

Unit 10 I’m going to be a basketball player.

Ⅰ.Teaching aims and demands:

Students learn to talk about future intentions.

Ⅱ.Teaching key and difficult points:

A.Vocabulary

puter programmer, professional, engineer, pilot

puter science, dream job, grow up, move to, fashion show, retire, save

3.resolution, get good grades, get a part-time job, make more friends

B.Target language

1. What are you going to be when you grow up?

I’m going to be a computer programmer.

2. How are you going to do that?

I’m going to study computer science.

C.Structures

Future with going to

Want to be

What, Where, When, How questions

D.Grammar

The simple future tense.

Ⅲ.Teaching aids :

A tape recorder

Ⅳ.Teaching methods:

Audio-lingual method; Communicative Approach; PPP

Ⅴ.This unit is divided into five periods.

Period 1 Listen and speak

Ⅰ.Teaching aims and demands:

Students learn to talk about future intentions.

Ⅱ.Key and difficult points:

A. Vocabulary

fessional, acting, take lessons, every day

puter programmer, engineer, baseball player, pilot, actor, actress, artist

B. Target language

1.What are you going to be when you grow up?

I’m going to be a computer programmer.

2.How are you going to do that?

I’m going to study computer science.

C.Structures

Future with going to

Want to be

What, How questions

D.Grammar

The simple future tense.

Ⅲ.Teaching aids :

A tape recorder

Ⅳ.Teaching methods:

Audio-lingual method; Communicative Approach; PPP

Ⅴ.Teaching procedures:

Step 1 Warming up

Task 1 Ask students to think about ways they already know to talk about future events. For example:

☆Where are you going next week?

I’m going to my grandmother’s house next week.

☆How long are you staying?

I’m staying for a week.

☆What are you doing on Saturday?

I’m playing tennis all day.

Task 2 Circle the –ing in each sentence. Say, We use ing words to talk about things that are going to happen in future. We are sure these things will happen.

Step 2 Key vocabulary

Task 1 Read each words to the class. Ask the students to point to the jobs that appear in the picture.

Task 2 Read the instructions and say, put a 1 after the most interesting job, put a 2 after the second most interesting job, and so on.

Task 3 Check to say which things are the most interesting in the class. Ask students to write the six jobs on the blackboard. Ask: How many students made engineer number 1?

Step 3 Target language

Task 1 Read the instructions.

Learn the target language:

What are you going to be when you grow up?

I’m going to be a computer programmer.

How are you going to do that?

I’m going to study computer science.

Task 2 Play the recording the first time. Students only listen.

Task 3 Play again. Ask students to draw lines connecting the jobs and the activities.

Task 4 Check the answers.

Step 4 Pair work

Task 1 Ask students to look at the pictures in activity 1a. Then ask students to read the sample conversations in activity 1c.

Task 2 Ask students to work in pairs and make their own conversations.

Task 4 Ask some pairs to present one or more of their conversations to the class.

Ⅵ Homework

1.Remember the vocabulary and the target language.

2.Review the simple future tense.

Period 2 Listen , speak and Grammar Focus

Ⅰ.Teaching aims and demands:

1. Revise the target language, and complete the listening practice;

2. Learn Grammar Focus.

Ⅱ.Key and difficult points:

A. Vocabulary

take acting lessons, move

B. Target language

1.What are you going to be when you grow up?

I'm going to be an actor.

2.How are you going to do that?

I'm going to take acting lessons.

C.Structures

Future with going to

What, Where, When, How questions

D.Grammar

The simple future tense.

Ⅲ.Teaching aids :

A tape recorder

Ⅳ.Teaching methods:

Audio-lingual method; Communicative Approach; PPP

Ⅴ.Teaching procedures:

Step 1 Revision

Task 1 Ask questions beginning with “What are you going to be when…” “How are you going to do…

Task 2 Practice the conversations using the target language students have already studied.

Step 2 Listening

Task 1 Read the instructions.

Task 2 Ask some students to say what they say.

Task 3 Play the recording the first time. Students only listen.

Task 4 Play again. Ask students to check the pictures of the things Cheng Han is going to do.

Task 5 Check the answers.

Step 3 Listening

Task 1 Read the instructions and point out the sample answer.

Task 2 Ask a student to read the sample questions and sample answers to the class.

Task 3 Play again. Ask students to fill the chart.

Task 4 Check the answers.

Step 4 Pair work

Task 1 Read the instructions for the activity.

Task 2 Ask students to read the dialogue to the class.

Task 3 Ask students to work in pairs, ask and answer,

Task 4 Check the answers by asking different pairs to do one question and answer each.

Step 5 Grammar Focus

Task 1 Read Grammar Focus

Task 2.Explain the two different ways of saying the same things.

I'm going to take acting lessons.

﹦ I'm taking acting lessons.

Ⅵ Homework

1.Revise the target language.

2.Finish off the exercises on work book.

Period 3 Read and speak

Ⅰ.Teaching aims and demands:

1 Revise the target language, and complete the reading practice;

2 Go on learning the simple future tense: be going to

Ⅱ.Key and difficult points:

A. Vocabulary

Somewhere, Paris, sound like, fashion show, part-time, save, at the same time, hold, rich, retire, yet

B. Target language

1. What are you going to be when you grow up?

I’m going to be an actor.

2. How are you going to do that?

I’m going to take acting lessons.

3.Where are you going to work?

C.Structures

Future with going to

Want to be

What, Where, When, How questions

D.Grammar

The simple future tense: be going to

Ⅲ.Teaching aids :

A tape recorder

Ⅳ.Teaching methods:

Audio-lingual method; Communicative Approach; Control reading

Ⅴ.Teaching procedures:

Step 1 Revision

Review the simple future tense: be going to.

Step 2 Reading

Task 1 Read the instructions.

Task 2 Ask students to read the diary on their own, and circle the words and phrases they don’t understand.

Task 3 Ask students to read the words and phrases they don’t understand, ask other students to explain.

Task 4 Ask students to underline the things that Tian Tian is going to do.

Task 5 Correct the answers.

Step 3 Writing and speaking

Task 1 Read the instructions.

Task 2 Have students write down answers about themselves, and tell their plans to their partner.

Task 3 Ask students to answer these questions. Have them work in pairs to ask and answer, then change the roles.

What …? Where…?How…?

Task 4 Ask some students to say their dialogues to the class .

Step 4 Group work

Task 1 Read the instructions and point to the picture. Write the year on the blackboard. Ask the class why that is an important date for Beijing and China.

Task 2 Write going to on the board. Ask :What are you going to do to help make the Olympics a success?

Task 3 Divide the class into groups of four or five students. Ask them to make their own conversations.

Task 4Ask each group to present its conversation to the class .

Ⅵ Homework

1 Revise the target language.

2 Revise the simple future tense: be going to.

3 Finish off the exercises on work book.

Period 4 Section B

Ⅰ.Teaching aims and demands:

Learn some new language, and complete the listening practice;

Ⅱ.Key and difficult points:

A. New language

fax, few, food, resolution, grade, healthier, instrument, part-time job, harder, learn, letter, lots of, resolutions, money, New Year, next year, make the soccer team

B. Structures

Future with going to

Want to be

What, Where, When, How questions

C. Grammar

The simple future tense: be going to

Ⅲ.Teaching aids :

A tape recorder

Ⅳ.Teaching methods:

Audio-lingual method; Communicative Approach; PPP

Ⅴ.Teaching procedures:

Step 1 Discussion

Get the students discussion the New Year’s resolutions in group of four by asking the questions like the following:

What are you going to do next year?

Why are you going to do so?... ..

Step 2 New words

Task 1 Ask students to tell when New Year’s Day is. Ask students what they do on New Year’s Eve.

Task 2 Ask students to explain the resolutions in their own words.

Task 3 Ask students to match the phrases and pictures on their own.

Step 3 Pair work

Task 1 Read the instructions and read the conversations to the class.

Task 2 Ask students to work in pairs to discuss what things they are going to do.

Task 3 Ask several pairs to present their conversations to the class.

Step 4 Listening

Task 1 Read the instructions and the phrases in activity 1a.

Task 2 Play the recording the first time. Students only listen.

Task 3 Play again. Ask students to circle the resolutions in activity 1a that they hear.

Task 5 Check the answers.

Step 5 Listening

Task 1 Read the instructions.

Task 2 Play again. Ask students to fill the chart.

Task 4 Check the answers.

Step 6 Group work

Task 1 Read the instructions for the activity. And read the sample conversations.

Task 2 Ask students to work in pairs.

Task 4 Ask some students to present their dialogues to the class.

Ⅵ Homework

1 Revise the target language.

2 Finish off the exercises on work book.

Period 5 Self check

Ⅰ.Teaching aims and demands:

Revise the content taught and complete the writing practice;

Ⅱ.Key and difficult points:

Future with going to

Want to be

What, Where, When, How questions

Writing practice

Ⅲ.Teaching aids :

A tape recorder

Ⅳ.Teaching methods:

Communicative Approach; Control reading and writing

Ⅴ.Teaching procedures:

Step 1 Revision

Review the simple future: be going to.

Step 2 Reading

Task 1 Read the magazine article to the class.

Task 2 Read the instructions to the class.

Task 3 Ask students to finish the activity on their own.

Task 4 Ask students to make a list of the New Year’s resolutions that the article mentions.

Step 3 Reading and Writing

Task 1 Read the instructions to the class.

Task 2 Have students writing a magazine article.

Task 3 Ask students to read their articles to the class.

Step 4 Writing

Task 1 Ask students to make a list of their resolutions.

Task 2 Ask students to write about their resolutions using the language learned in this unit.

Task 3 Ask some students to read their resolutions.

Step 5 Group work: Clean and Green

Task 1 Ask a student to read the instructions and the example answer for the class.

Task 2 Ask Ss to work in groups and write the group plans.

Step 6 Self check

Task 1 Fill in the blanks.

Task 2 Write a list about your plans what the American exchange students and you are going to do.

Task 3 Just for fun: read and act out.

Ⅵ Homework

1.Finish the writing practice.

2.Revise the words and target language of this unit.

人教版八年级英语课件 篇11

主题一：My Favorite Holiday

My favorite holiday is Christmas. I love Christmas because it is a time when my whole family gets together to celebrate. We decorate the Christmas tree and hang up stockings for Santa Claus to fill with presents. On Christmas Eve, we go to church and sing Christmas carols. Then when we get back home, we all exchange gifts and have a big family dinner. The food is always delicious, and we have all sorts of traditional Christmas foods like turkey, mashed potatoes, and cranberry sauce. After dinner, we usually watch a Christmas movie or play a board game together. It's such a fun and joyous holiday that I look forward to every year.

主题二：My Dream Job

My dream job is to be a veterinarian. I have always loved animals, and I want to help them in any way that I can. As a veterinarian, I would be able to care for sick and injured animals, perform surgeries, and help animals live long and healthy lives. It would be such a rewarding job to see the joy on pet owners' faces when their animals are healthy again. In order to become a veterinarian, I will need to study hard in school and go to college to get a degree in veterinary medicine. It will take a lot of hard work and dedication, but I am determined to make my dream a reality.

主题三：My Favorite Hobby

My favorite hobby is playing basketball. I love the thrill of the game and the feeling of adrenaline rushing through my body when I'm on the court. I have been playing basketball since I was in elementary school, and I have continued to play through high school and beyond. I love the teamwork involved in basketball and the way that everyone has a specific role to play on the court. It's such a fun and exciting sport that keeps me on my toes. When I'm not playing basketball, I love watching games on TV and analyzing the strategies that teams use. Basketball is my passion, and I feel lucky to be able to participate in such a fun and challenging sport.

人教版八年级英语课件 篇12

主题：我的暑假生活

暑假是学生们最期待的假期之一。今年的暑假，我度过了非常充实的假期生活。

刚开始的几天，我和家人一起去了海边。那里有美丽的沙滩、蔚蓝的海水和清新的海风。我们在海边玩了很长时间，沙滩上堆沙、踢球，海边散步、游泳。每当我游到深海里，感觉自己就像是一个海豚一样，自由自在地畅游在海水里。在海边的几天里，我收获了许多美好的回忆！

接下来的几天里，我参加了一项夏令营活动。这个夏令营是关于野外生存的，我们学习了生火、野外探险、搭建帐篷等基本技能。虽然有时候会遇到很多困难，但是我觉得这些经历让我不仅明白了许多生活技能，还让我变得更加独立和勇敢。

除此之外，我还去了一些音乐、绘画和舞蹈的课程。这些课程让我学到了许多新的技能和知识，也让我发现了自己未曾发现的兴趣爱好。我觉得这些课程让我的暑假变得更加多姿多彩。

在整个暑假中，我最难忘的是看到了一些村庄和山区的孩子们。他们的家庭并不富裕，但却一直保持着积极向上的生活态度。我和一些同学组织了一次公益活动，为他们送去了一些文具和学习用品。我感觉到这些行动唤起了我的内心热情，让我感觉到有时候我们所做的一些小事也能够改变其他人的生活。

通过这个暑假的生活，我明白了许多事情。我发现自己能够承担更多的责任，也更加关注社会和他人。我对未来感到更加充满信心，相信只要努力，不断学习和进步，自己会成为一个不凡的人！

人教版八年级英语课件 篇13

作为人教版八年级下册的英语教材，这份课件涉及到了许多有趣且具有教育意义的主题。以下将分别就其中的几个主题进行阐述。

一、健康主题

健康主题是人教版八年级下册英语中一个非常重要的主题，主要是帮助学生了解身体健康与保健知识，在学习英语的同时也关注健康。在这个主题下，有一些让人印象深刻的话题，例如：

1. 我们应该如何保持身体健康

2. 运动可以帮我们保持身体健康，你喜欢哪一种运动？

3. 我们每天该喝多少水

这些话题旨在提醒学生们人们生活中经常关注的健康方面，并且在英语学习中也与之相应地涉及了词汇和语法知识。通过这些课堂教学的内容，学生们将更好地认识到自己的健康与保健方面的需求，而且更好地利用英语语言来表达这些方面的内容。

二、旅游主题

旅游主题是人教版八年级下册英语中的另一个主题，它的出现是出于培养学生们出国旅游的兴趣，同时也通过旅游的主题，练习学生们的口语和写作方面的能力。以下是旅游主题中的一些话题范例：

1. 介绍你所在的城市，它有哪些美丽的景点

2. 你梦想去哪里旅游？为什么？

3. 是参加旅游团还是自由行更好？

通过这些话题的学习，学生们可以更好地认识世界各地的不同文化，了解其他国家的风俗与习惯，还能通过这些话题锻炼英语口语与写作方面的能力。此外，这些话题还可以作为促进学生们对本身国度与文化的认识的途径。

三、音乐主题

音乐主题是人教版八年级下册英语教材的另一个有趣的主题。在音乐主题中，学生将学习到与音乐有关的词汇、表达方法、歌曲和流行文化等方面的内容。以下是音乐主题中的一些范例话题，

1. 你喜欢听哪些类型的音乐？

2. 你认为什么样的歌曲会流行？

3. 你认为音乐中的歌词是更重要还是旋律更重要？

通过学习音乐主题，学生们将更好地了解音乐流派、文化和流行趋势等方面的内容，对时间和社会文化的变迁也会有一个更好的了解。同时，学生们还可以学习到如何运用英语语言来表达音乐方面的内容。

四、故事主题

人教版八年级下册英语教材的最后一个主题是故事主题。在这个主题下，学生将接触到不同的故事和文学作品，帮助学生更好的学习语言和文学。以下是这个主题中的范例话题：

1. 谈谈你最喜欢的儿童故事

2. 你最喜欢的图书是哪一本？为什么？

3. 你最喜欢哪一位作家？他们的书对你有哪些影响？

通过学习故事主题，学生们可以了解各种不同类型的故事和文学作品，并通过它们来提高听说读写方面的能力。您也可以结合播放相应的音乐、幻灯片和视频，通过多元化的方式来呈现故事主题培养学生的文学、语言和审美能力。

以上是人教版八年级下册英语教材的几个主题，每个主题具有他们自己的特点和教育意义。在日后的英语学习中，学生们可以根据这些主题所包含的方面来提升自己的学习水平与能力！

人教版八年级英语课件 篇14

一．教材分析：

本单元是七年级下册第三单元的教学内容，是以How do you get to school?为中心话题。围绕交通方式展开，谈论某人如何到达某地，路程有多远，需要花多长时间。第一课时学生需要掌握基本三个句型，即How do you get to school?（How does …get to school?） How long does it take ？How far is it from … to …? 和交通方式的两种表达形式，即take the/a…to…与 go…by …，这与学生的日常生活密切相关，学生熟悉，乐于学习，易于学习。

二．学情分析：

七年级的学生在六年级学过交通方式的表达及一般现在时的三单形式，相当一部分知识对学生而言是知识再现，但学生的基础参差不齐。需要引导学生课前预习单词，复习交通方式的表达，为完成本节课的教学任务做好准备。

(1)掌握重要的词汇短语：train, bus, subway, bike, take the subway/train/bus, ride a/the bike, by train/bus/subway.

(2)学会谈论如何到达某地的交通方式，路程即需要的时间。

掌握基本的句型,

How do you get to school? I take the …to school./I go to school by…

How does …get to …? He/She takes the/a…to … /He/She goes to … by …

How long does it take ？ It takes…minutes.

How far is it from … to …? It’s about …kilometers.

2. 语言技能目标：

（1）能根据录音判断交通方式。

（2）能以不同的人称询问他人到达某地的方式，距离，需要花费的时间。

（3）能简单地描述自己上学的方式，距离及需要花费的时间。

（4）能简单地描述自己上学的方式，距离及需要花费的时间。

3.情感态度目标：

通过完成各项交际任务，让学生养成良好的学习习惯，包括听讲，与他人合作学习，相互帮助。让学生积累学习经验，能够大胆地有条理地发表个人的观点。

How do you get to school? I take the …to school./I go to school by…

How does …get to …? He/She takes the/a…to … /He/She goes to … by …

How long does it take ？ It takes…minutes.

How far is it from … to …? It’s about …kilometers.

2.设置各项小任务，让学生体验成功。适时评价激励学生。

3.通过运用多媒体课件，给学生创造良好的语境，让学生有话可说。

1. Greeting.

2. Freetalk: How do you go to school? (using two ways)

I go to school by…or I take the/a…to school.

students the pictures and practice.

How do you get to school? I take the bus to school or I get to school by bus.

How do you get to school? I take the bus to school or I get to school by bus.

How does she get to school? She takes the train to school or She gets to school by train.

I get to school by …

3,Summary.

Step3. 1a. Match the words with the pictures.

Step4. Listen to the tape, finish 1b.

Step5. Presentation.

1. Read the numbers.

2.Listen and write the numbers.

3.Introduce new drills: How long does it take? It takes …

Step6. Practice.

1.How long does it take? It takes …

2. A: How do you get to school?

B: I take the …to school.

A:How long does it take ？

B: It takes about…minutes.

3. Pair work.

Step7. Presentation.

New drills : How far is it from … to …? It’s about …kilometers.

Step8. Practice.

(1) A: How far is it from … to …?

B: It’s about …kilometers.

(2)A: How do you get to school?

A: How long does it take?

B: It takes about forty minutes.

A: How far is it from your home to the park?

B: It’s about 5 kilometers.

Step9. Listen to the tape, finish 2b.

Step10. Pair work.

Translate and write them down.

1，你怎么去学校呢？How do you get to school?,

2，我经常步行，但有时候坐公共汽车。

I usually walk but sometimes I take a bus.

3，要用多长时间呢？How long does it take?

4，步行大约25分钟，坐公共汽车十分钟。

It takes about 25 minutes to walk and 10 minutes by bus.

1. --通常你怎样去上学。

我通常骑车去上学。

_____ ___ you usually go to school?

I usually go to school _____ ______.

2. 地铁站离汽车站大约有300米远。

The subway station is _______ 300_______ _____ ______ the bus stop.

3. 他通常每天用一小时做作业。

It usually ___________half an hour _____ _____his homework every day.

Key words：

train, bus, subway, bike, take the subway/train/bus,

ride a/the bike, by train/bus/subway.

Target languages：

How do you get to school?

I take the …to school./I go to school by…

How does …get to …?

He/She takes the/a…to … /He/She goes to … by …

How long does it take ？ It takes…minutes.

How far is it from … to …? It’s about …kilometers.

八年级英语上册课件(精品11篇)

工作总结之家的编辑历经精选，竭诚为您打造了“八年级英语上册课件”。为了让教学过程更加顺畅，教师需要预先备好教案课件，并且尽力将每一份课件设计得更为完善。只有撰写出优秀的教案，才能充分显现出教学目的。希望您能继续关注我们的网站，我们会持续更新和优化内容！

八年级英语上册课件 篇1

新目标英语八年级上Unit5教案

一、教学目标： 1.语言知识目标：

1)能掌握以下单词：sitcom, news, soap, educational, plan, hope, find out, discussion, stand, happen, may, expect 能掌握以下句型：

① What do you want to watch? ② What do you think of talk shows? ③ I can’t stand them.④ I don’t mind them.⑤ I like/love them./ I don’t like them.2)能了解以下语法：

动词不定式结构做动词的宾语；后面接动词不定式做宾语的动词。3）学会陈述自己的看法；学会谈论自己的喜好。2.情感态度价值观目标：

学会谈论流行文化，了解各类电视和电视节目的名称和自己的喜欢。注意引导学生们形成正确的文化观念，大力培养学生们的跨文化意义，形成自己独立的个性。

二、教学重难点 1.教学重点：

1)学习掌握各类电视和电视节目的名称。

2)掌握动词不定式结构做动词的宾语；了解后面接动词不定式做宾语的动词。

2.教学难点：

掌握动词不定式结构做动词的宾语；了解后面接动词不定式做宾语的动词。

三、教学过程 Step 1 Lead-in 学生们根据图片提示学习各类电视节目并且练习运用What do you think of…? Step 2 New words Learn the names of the TV shows.Step 3 Game 1.引导学生们看1a中的图片，根据提示依次说出每一部TV Show的名称。2.让学生们看图片及1a中的词汇，将图片与正确的词汇相连。3.Check the answers with the Ss.Step 4 Listening 1.T: Tell Ss to read the shows in the box.Make sure they know the meaning of the shows.2.Play the recording for the Ss to listen and number the shows1-4.3.Play the recording again.Check the answers with the Ss.Step 5 Pair work 1.Let Ss look at the pictures in the box.Then explain the meaning of each expression to the Ss.2.Let Ss read the conversation after the teacher.Then let Ss make their own conversation using the shows and expressions in the box.3.Let some pairs ask and answer about the shows.Step 6 Listening Work on 2a: 1.Read the shows in the box of 2a.Tell Ss to remember the information.2.Play the recording for the Ss to listen and number the TV shows [1-5].3.Play the recording again to check the on 2b: 1.Let Ss read the sentences below.Explain some main sentences for the Ss.Make sure they know what to do.2.Play the recording for the Ss to write the correct words in the blanks.3.Play the recording again to check the answers.Step 7 Pair work 1.Tell Ss ask and answer questions about the TV shows in 2a.They can use the information that is true for them.2.Let Ss read conversation after the teacher.3.Explain some main points for the Ss.4.Ss act the conversation in pairs.Ask some pairs to act out their conversations.

八年级英语上册课件 篇2

八年级英语上册单词表

1模块

1、相关的两个人，一对。

3、拼写；拼字

5、练习

7、意义；意思

9、句子

11、语法

13、查，查找

15、犯错误

17、建议；意见

19、可能的21、笔记本

23、发……的音

25、电台，广播

27、关键行动，非常重要的29、极好的；极好的31、同意某人

33、请求给予

35、主要的；基础的

37、向…提出意见；建议；忠告

39、,交谈；谈话

41、合理的；合乎常情的

43、放置 2模块

1、小山；小丘

3、宽的，宽阔的5、相当地，非常，很

7、比

9、北，北方；北方的；朝北的

2、改正；纠正。正确的；对的；

4、单词；字；词

6、找到与…相配之物，使成对；使相配

8、把…填完整；使完全。

10、字典；词典

12、信；字母

14、错误；过错

16、理解；明白

18、应该

20、写下；记下

22、忘，忘记

24、大声地；出声地

26、发音

28、主要的，最大的30、同意；赞同

32、词汇；词汇量

34、改善，改进

36、回；次

38、害羞的；腼腆的40、迅速地；快地

42、提议，建议

2、,某一地区人口，全体居民

4、百万

6、相当好，很好

8、成为；变成

10、,南方，南；朝南的，在南方的

11、西；西方在西方的；朝西的13、特别；尤其

15、大学

17、区域，地区

19、山；山岳

21、雨伞 3模块

1、棒球

3、无聊的；烦人的

5、令人愉悦的；使人轻松的

7、已经，早已

9、怎么了？

11、有乐趣的；令人愉快的

13、体育场

15、介意，讨厌；反对

17、大量；众多

19、粗心的；疏忽的

21、教练

23、在比赛或战斗中对某人或某事物

25、练习

27、热身；做准备活动

29、更好地；更好的

31、开心的；满足的

33、可惜；遗憾

35、大声地，响亮地

4模块|1||

1、尤指公路，路

3、除…之外

5、同班同学

12、故乡；家乡

14、因…而闻名

16、岛；岛屿

18、低的，矮的 20、农村地区，乡下；

2、排球

4、使人兴奋的；令人激动的

6、体育比赛中得分；记分

8、问题；麻烦

10、使受伤；使疼痛

12、奥林匹克运动会

14、未击中；未达到

16、大量；众多

18、战胜；打败

20、…用欢呼声激励；为…加油

22、球迷或影迷、歌迷俱乐部

24、体育训练；操练

26、使暖和；使…温暖

28、通常的，平常的 30、下午放学后的，课外的

32、,传送；传递

34、机会，可能性

36、自信的

2、交通事故；意外事件

4、选择

6、远；遥远地；远的；遥远的

7、远离

9、拥挤的；人数过多的11、旅行；旅程

13、停放车；泊车

15、然而；但是

5模块

1、女演员

3、提议；提出

5、最后，终于

7、戏剧，歌剧的一幕

9、普通的；一般的

11、描述，描写

13、校长

15、小说

17、表条件如果；若

6模块

1、蛇

3、细长的；瘦的5、处于危险中

7、关心的，感兴趣的

9、想到，想出

11、野生的；野生环境

13、夺去；拿走

15、和平；太平

17、告示，布告

19、抚养；筹集钱款；养育；

21、婴儿，婴孩

23、科学家

25、,西南西南的；朝西南的

8、距离上近点，接近的。距离上接近地

10、一直；不断地

12、预订

14、,在…范围之外

16、花费；价钱为。费用，代价，成本

2、尤指亚洲的茶馆

4、时间的最后一段；末尾。结束

6、不知道

8、显示；展示；演出；表演

10、第二十

12、社会

14、大学；学院

16、给…取名；给…命名

18、魔术的；戏法的

2、脖子；脖子

4、危险；危害

6、终于；最后

8、允许；准许

10、保护，防卫

12、逐渐变得；生长

14、充分的；足够的

16、和平地；平静地

18、照顾；照看 20、研究；探讨

22、,情况；形势

24、生育；繁殖

26、为了

27、政府

29、开办；设立；创办；建立

31、自然公园

33、喂养；饲养

7模块

1、下落；跌落

3、洞，孔；洞穴

5、嘘示意某人不要说话

7、茶会

9、偶尔；一两次

11、粉红的。粉红色

13、田地；牧场

15、从顶部向下深的

17、降落或挑落、跌落

8模块

1、苍白的

3、转到某物的另一边

5、使碰撞

7、及时

9、风险；危险

11、注意；留心

13、并排地；肩并肩地

15、爬；攀爬

17、投；掷

19、疼痛；痛

21、药；药物 9模块

1、噪音；杂音

3、笔记；随笔

28、设置；设定 30、大自然；自然界

32、研制；制定

34、象征；标志

2、跟随；紧跟

4、兔子，家兔

6、地面

8、两次；两倍

10、突然地；出乎意料地

12、口袋；衣袋

14、考虑

16、当……的时候

18、干的；干燥的

2、出现；显露

4、街角，拐角

6、高兴的；欢喜的

8、…从…跌落

10、注意力

12、物体或形状的侧面

14、咬；叮

16、躲藏；躲

18、冰箱

20、更坏的；更坏的。更糟；更坏

2、准备；预备

4、报告；汇报

5、增长、增大

7、引起；造成9、增大；增长

11、十亿

13、口稍等

15、垃圾，废弃物

17、当地的；本地的

19、污染

21、服务，公共服务

10模块

1、云；云雾

3、雪；下雪

5、多云的

7、下雪的，多雪的

9、多风的，刮大风的

11、厚的13、开玩笑；说笑话

15、温度

17、度数；度

19、湿的；下雨的

21、可怕的；使人烦恼的

23、可能；或许

25、英里

27、,西北。西北的；向西北的

29、有时；间或 11模块

1、有檐的帽子

3、同类事物的一套、副、组

5、筷子

6、巨大的；庞大的

8、麻烦；问题

10、出生

12、第五；五分之一

14、套房；公寓

16、安静的；寂静的

18、学生；尤指小学生 20、公众的；公共的

22、解决问题

2、阵雨

4、暴风雨；

6、下雨的；多雨的

8、晴朗的

10、滑冰

12、冰

14、可能；也许

16、零下的；负的

18、然而，尽管 20、,某人或某事物也不

22、但愿；希望

24、快点

26、围绕地

28、,东南。东南的；朝东南的2、国际象棋

4、一副国际象棋

6、玩具

7、电子视频的9、礼物

11、立即，立刻

13、收受；接受

15、例子；实例

17、必须；应该

19、认真严肃的；不开玩笑的

21、经验；经历

23、某人；有人

25、三明治；夹心面包

27、炸鱼加炸薯条

29、先生；男士

12模块

1、破碎的

3、楼梯；梯级的复数

5、急救

7、想像；设想

9、…在…的底部

11、…怎么了？

13、举起；提起；抬起。电梯

15、有害的

17、训练；培训

19、盖；盖上

21、警告，告诫

23、在…正下方；在…下面

25、保持；留在

27、…不和…接触

29、勇敢的；无畏的

31、电力

8、电子游戏

10、惊奇；意外之事。使某人吃惊

12、差异；差别

14、传统习俗

16、例如

18、月；月份

20、有…的味道；味道；滋味

22、逗留；停留

24、首次；初次

26、炸土豆条；炸薯条

28、在…之上；向……之上 30、肩，肩膀

2、玻璃

4、援助；帮助

6、医学的；医疗的

8、底部；下端

10、错误的；有毛病的。错误地；不正确地

12、麻烦；烦恼；困难

14、抬起；提起

16、投下；使落下

18、确保；确认 20、地震

22、里面；内部；在里面；

24、窗；窗户

26、不挨…太近的；清除；清理；移走

28、镇静的，沉着的 30、提供帮助的；有用的

八年级英语上册课件 篇3

一、 Analysis of the text教材分析

1、 Teaching教学内容：Talk about personal traits and how to compare people谈论人物的个性特征及如何对比人物

2、Statue of the Text教材的地位和作用

从教材的整合来说，本部分既有形容词用法的延续，又为后面形容词级的学习打下基础，具有承上启下的作用；从本单元来说，它既是本单元的基本语言知识，又为本单元知识的扩展和综合语言的运用奠定坚实的基础。因此，上好这一课，既可以让知识学习具有一定的延续性，又为后面的教学做好铺垫。

3、Teaching goals教学目标：

1）Language goal知识目标让学生掌握本课的词汇运用。

2）Ability goal能力目标让学生学会用英语与他人谈论人的个性特征和使用形容词进行比较的话题，以及进一步提高学生的英语语言表达能力；

3）Emotional goal情感目标激发学生的学习兴趣，体验英语语言的美，体验知识间的相互联系。让学生充满自信，体验成就感和合作精神。而且通过学习比较级使学生懂得在学习和生活中应相互理解、相互帮助、相互学习。

4、 Important points重点：掌握形容词比较级的变化规则及句型

5、Difficult points难点：使用比较级自如表达

二、Teaching Methods教学方法：

根据英语“课标”的要求，课程要从学生的学习兴趣、生活经验和认知水平出发，发展学生的综合语言运用能力，提高跨文化意识和形成自主学习能力。因此，我将在教学中采用多媒体辅助教学、任务型教学模式，结合听说法、竞赛法以循序渐进的方式来进行教学。

采用听说法和多媒体辅助教学来导入和呈现本节的基本词汇和句型，目的在于用师生互动的方式，共同观察图片，激活学生对所学知识的兴趣，使学生对新知识的识记经过一个由形象思维到抽象思维的转化过程，因此记忆效果更好。

采用任务型教学模式，在活动中以竞赛法来突出重点，培养学生综合语言运用能力，这样不仅激活学生的主体意识，而且激活了英语语言，使学生的自信感逐步增强，从而体验到成功的喜悦。

三、Learning Methods学法：

教法的选择固然重要，但学法也是必不可少的，我们都知道，学生的学习过程并不是孤立于课堂教学之中，应遵循学生的身心发展规律和学习规律，教师在教学的过程中要倡导学生体验、实践、参与、合作与交流的学习方式。瑞士心理学家让？皮亚杰的“建构主义理论”指出：学习是获取知识的过程，但知识不是通过教师传授得到的，而是学习者在一定的情景下，借助他人（包括教师和学习伙伴）的帮助，利用必要的学习资料，通过建构的方式而获得的。结合我校的学情，在本节教学中我主要采用归纳法和小组合作学习的方法。使用归纳法让学生归纳总结形容词比较级的变化规则；使用小组合作学习的方法，让学生参与竞赛和故事表演，使学生用心去体验集体的力量，去感悟合作的魅力，在活动中体验合作成功的快乐。

四、Teaching Steps教学程序：

Activity I活动一：Leading in激趣导入

在本活动中通过听说法配合多媒体辅助教学导入新课，用多媒体显示图画，让学生认识并掌握本课所要学的基本词汇。利用两个人物之间的不同，引出比较级的句子。让学生认识比较级的基本句型。本环节以学生原有的知识为切入点，对比两者之间的不同，不知不觉地将学生引入新课，达到润物无声之效果。

Activity II活动二：Warming up单词热身练习

要想让学生正确地使用比较级，首先应掌握形容词比较级的变化规则。因此，我给出一系列形容词及其比较级形式，让学生通过仔细观察并得出形容词比较级的变化规则，然后朗读记忆。在这一环节，我使用了教学的归纳法，意在培养学生的自主探究能力、观察能力和归纳能力。

Activity III活动三：Comparing句子热身练习

在学生掌握了比较级的变化规则后，便可以开始进行句子的热身练习。要求学生俩人一组用比较级来表达自己与同伴之间的差异，正确地认识自我。此项活动从贴近学生的`学习、生活入手，记忆深刻，使学生很容易掌握重点和难点，准确描述人物的个性特征。

Activity IV活动四：A guessing game“猜谜”游戏

——Who is he/she？他/她是谁？

我认为要充分挖掘教材的内涵，利用游戏来培养学生的听力能力和积极参与教学的主动性，要求一位学生描述班里的另一位学生，并和自己作比较，其他学生猜所描述的人是谁，这样可以给学生更多的发言机会来表达自己的思想。不仅反馈于上一环节的活动，也突出了本节的重点。学生在游戏中逐渐学会了用比较级自如表达，这也是突破难点的一个过程。

Activity V活动五：Competition小组竞赛

本活动采用任务型教学模式及小组自由合作学习的方式，这个环节的步骤是：把全班分为四个小组，每组抽取一个号码，在规定的时间内使用比较级对所抽取的图画进行描述，说出句子最多的小组获胜。此项活动可以培养学生的合作精神和竞争意识，同时可以训练学生快速思维的能力。

Activity VI活动六：Acting知识的拓展

此环节是通过任务型教学途径，分小组用所给的图画续编并表演故事。然后评出小组。这项活动要求学生积极与他人合作，共同完成学习任务，进一步培养了学生运用所学的知识锻炼口语表达能力、和逻辑思维能力。

此项活动后的小结也是本课的总结：“From this story we know，when we are better than others.Don’t laugh at others.When someone is better than you，don’t be frustrated.No one is perfect。 We should learn from each other and help each other.”这个故事告诉我们一个道理：当你比别人强的时候，不要嘲笑别人；当你在某些方面不如别人时，不要自卑。没有人是完美的。在生活和学习中，我们应该相互帮助、相互学习。

Activity VII活动七：Exercises巩固训练

用本节课学过的内容进行当堂训练、当堂巩固，做到“堂堂清”。

五、Homework作业：

《英语课程标准》建议教师把“任务型”教学活动延伸到课堂之外的学习和生活之中。因此，我在家庭作业布置中，分常规性作业和探究性作业两类：

常规性作业：背记本单元的生词。

探究性作业：写作文一篇，标题是“My Friend and I”。

（要求：写出你和你的朋友之间的相同点和不同点。）

六、Blackboard Design板书设计：

They are twins.

They are both lovely.

Xiaoya is calmer than Li Wen.

Li Wen is more outgoing than Xiaoya

A is形容词比较级than B

补充：学生在使用比较级时容易出现的问题：

1、比较的对象不一致。如：My hair is longer than you.

2、双音节形容词的比较级形式使用混乱。

八年级英语上册课件 篇4

新目标英语八年级上册unit7课件

Teaching and learning steps

Step 1 Learn to read the words on p127

1. Look at the new words and try to read them in pairs.

2. Let one student to read them out .

3. Correct the pronunciation.

Step 2 : Learn to rem ember words on p 103

一. Remember the words by looking at pictures.

1. robot

2. tree

3. rocket

4. astronaut

5. space station

6.moon

7. pet

8. parrot

9. the Word Cup

10. scientist

11.factory

12.earthquake

13.snake

14.toothbrush

二. Remember the words by matching itself with its meaning.

1. probably：maybe

2. unpleasant: not happy

3. housework: chores

三. Remember the words by th eir similar pronunciations and forms.

1. myself yourself herself himself

2. few fewer

3. look book took

4. which such

5. man human

6.bought thought

7. sound found

8. see seem

四. Remember the words

1. possible （可能的） impossible（不可能的）

2. bored（无聊的.,修饰人） boring（无聊的，修饰物）

3.interview （动词，采访） interviewer（名词，采访者）

五.Remember the words by their Chinese.

Step 3 Consolidation of words

听写单词，老师提学 生默。不会的，再 记忆，默写。

八年级英语上册课件 篇5

《新目标八年级上册英语教案》详细具体且生动

《新目标八年级上册英语教案》是一本帮助八年级学生提高英语听、说、读、写能力的教材。该教材结合了现代教育理念和国际化教育趋势，内容丰富多样，充满趣味性，在教学实践中广受好评。本文将详细、具体且生动地介绍该教材的特点、教学目标和教学方法。

首先，新目标八年级上册英语教案的特点是全面、系统性强。该教材包含了八个单元，每个单元的内容涵盖了语法、词汇、听力、口语、阅读和写作等方面。从语言技能的培养出发，设计了一系列有针对性的练习和活动，使学生在全方位、多角度地开展英语学习，提高综合语言能力。

其次，新目标八年级上册英语教案的教学目标是灵活、实用性强。该教材以培养学生的语言运用能力和交际能力为目标，注重学生的实际语言应用能力培养。在每个单元中，教学目标既强调语言基础知识的掌握，又注重语言技能的训练，如听力、口语和阅读等。通过多种情景对话和交际活动，培养学生在实际生活中运用英语的能力。

新目标八年级上册英语教案的教学方法注重互动、启发式教学。在教学过程中，教师采用多种教学方法，如讲授法、演示法、情景模拟法等，激发学生的学习兴趣和积极性。教师还注重培养学生的自主学习能力和合作意识，通过小组合作学习、角色扮演等活动，激发学生的创造力和合作精神。

除了上述特点、教学目标和教学方法外，《新目标八年级上册英语教案》还有一些其他值得注意的亮点。首先，该教材注重培养学生的跨文化交际能力，通过介绍不同国家的文化习俗和民间故事等内容，促使学生对不同文化的理解和尊重。同时，该教材也注重培养学生的学习策略和思维能力，通过综合训练、思维导图和情景模拟等方式，培养学生的英语学习方法和思维习惯。

总之，《新目标八年级上册英语教案》全面、系统性强，教学目标灵活、实用性强，教学方法注重互动、启发式教学。通过该教材的学习，学生能够在全方位的英语学习中提高听、说、读、写能力，培养跨文化交际能力和学习思维能力。同时，教材内容丰富多样，充满趣味性，能够激发学生的学习兴趣和积极性。因此，《新目标八年级上册英语教案》是一本优秀的教学资源，对提高八年级学生的英语水平具有重要意义。

八年级英语上册课件 篇6

本学期的英语教学主要以围绕培养学生的语言运用能力的同时，更加重视培养学生的语言学习策略和技能，这些策略和技能是帮助学生进一步学好英语的基础，让学生掌握了一定语言运用技巧后，能够学会用英语表达思想、与人交流。

本学期教材设计具有交际意义的任务和活动，目的是让学生在课堂上“活起来，“动”起来，希望学生充分参与，能够与老师合作。

教材分析：

本套教材根据学生心理特点、认知水平和兴趣爱好来编写。

1、教材不仅帮助学生学习英语语言知识，更重要的是帮助学生发展语言运用能力，让学生学会用英语表达思想、学会交流。

2、教材充分考虑学生的生活实际和学习需要，教材的内容和活动都与学生的生活和兴趣紧密相连，目的是让学生在英语学习中不感到枯燥乏味，而是有话可说、有话想说、有活能说。

3、教材进一步丰富了文化教学的内容，包括民族文化。英语国家的文化和非英国国家的文化。通过文化内容的.学习，使学生视野更开阔，思想更丰富，思维更活跃，交流更得体。

学情分析：

八年级学生，总体基础明显参差不齐，有几个学生根本没有学习目标，一两个完全放弃学习，纪律不够好，这成了班级英语成绩的总体提高的拦路虎。另外，学生在情感态度、学习策略等方面还存在诸多需要进一步解决的问题。例如：很多学生不明确英语学习的目的;有些学生在学习中缺乏小组合作意识;大多数同学没有养成良好的学习习惯，不能做好课前预习课后复习，学习没有计划性和策略性;不善于发现和总结语言规律。

教学重难点：

重点： 继承学习词汇和习惯用语，语法知识点：频率副词、询问情况、方式状语、提出邀请、形容词比较级、最高级等。 重难点：

1、状语从句和形容词。

2、Wh-引导的特殊疑问句，表示频率的副词，情态动词should/shouldnt的用法，When 引导的状语从句，被动语态。

教学措施：

1、认真钻研教材，提高自己驾驭教材的能力。

2、准确引导优秀生，抓好中等生，辅导好学困生。

3、作业批改到位，发现问题及时反溃或单独辅导。

4、认真备课，认真上课，尽量提高课堂的效率。

5、要求学生背诵并默写部分对话，培养语感。

6、认真贯彻晨读制度：规定晨读内容，加强监督，保证晨读效果。

八年级英语上册课件 篇7

培养学生优良的英语学习兴趣、习惯，帮助学生树立自信心，养成良好的英语学习习惯，提高、发展自主学习的能力，形成有效的学习策略;使学生掌握一定的语言基本知识和技能，有较好的语感，获得初步运用英语的能力，为实际应运打下扎实的基础。同时注重综合能力的开发、提高，培养他们的观察、思维、记忆、想象和创造等方面的能力;让学生了解中西方文化的差异，培养爱国主义精神，增强世界观意识，并结合课外学习，达到教学的最优秀性，培养学生良好的自学能力和习惯，并做到持之以恒，使本年段的英语教学能进一步发展、提高。

在这一学期中，主要培养学生学习英语的兴趣，继续培养学习英语的学习习惯，要很好地完成本学期的教学学习任务，重视阅读能力的培养，在实际教育工作中把做好学生思想工作放在学科教育的首位，通过师生的共同努力，为学科和学生本人再创佳绩。

八年级英语是人民教育出版社社出版的'新目标英语，教材编排有以下目的：

1.要使学生受到听、说、读、写、英语的训练，掌握最基础的语言知识和语言技能以及培养初步援用英语交际的能力;养成良好的外语学习习惯，掌握学习外语的基本方法;为进一步学习和运用英语打下扎实的基础。

2.使学生明确学习英语的目的性，

3.培养初步运用英语交际的能力和自学能力。

三、教材重点、难点

1、语音教学 本册课本在上册的基础上进一步学习和运用音标和单词的发音规则，着重抓好学生的预习，自学能力。

2、词汇教学 本册课本所要学习、掌握的单词约400个，另有固定搭配和习惯用语若干条，任务较重。

八年级英语上册课件 篇8

【学习目标】

1.学生能掌握六个频率副词的用法。

2.学生能听懂谈论各项活动的对话;学会用英语谈论做各项活动的频率。

3.通过完成各项活动，学生能够养成团结协作的意识，并能合理利用时间。

【学习重点】

学生能够学会用六个频率副词谈论做各项活动的频率。

【学习难点】

通过交流表达和听力训练，掌握六个频率副词

Learning action tips：

Play the video about students\'activities on weekends in class. Let students watch it.

Task 1

Learning action tips：Previewthe words on Page2 in the word list. Students read the words by phonetic symbols,then underline new words in the text and mark the Chinese meaning. At last finishthe task in 1a.

【知识链接】

▲once，twice，three times等次数的表达法

(1)这三个词都表示次数，once是一次，twice是两次，除了一次、两次，其他的次数都用“数字+times”表达。如：三次是three times，五次是fivetimes。

(2)这些表达数的词后与一段时间连用，表示动作多长时间发生几次，即动作的频率。

【导练】

(1)我一周看一次电视。

I watch TV once aweek.

(2)我每天读三次英语。

I read English threetimes__aday.情景导入　生成问题

T：What do you usually do on weekends?

S1：I usually play basketball.

S2：I often go shopping.

S3：I sometimes help my parents with housework.

自学互研　生成能力

Task1Let\'sread new words and the phrases.

1.I can read.(我会读)

housework，once，twice，Internet，program，always，usually，often，sometimes，hardly ever，never

2.I can write.(我会写)

翻译下列短语和句子。

(1)帮忙做家务help__with__housework

(2)在周末on__weekends

(3)去看电影go__to__the__movies

(4)一周两次twice__a__week

(5)上网use__the__Internet

(6)动物世界animal__world

(7)hardly ever几乎不

(8)How often do you watchTV?你多久看一次电视?

(9)我从不逛街。I__never__go__shopping.

(10)I exercise three timesa week.我一周锻炼三次。

3.I can summarize.(我会总结)

频率副词hardly ever的用法：

hardly ever意为“几乎不”，表示否定概念。一般位于实义动词之前，be动词、助动词或情态动词之后。如：

Lucy hardly ever callsme.露西几乎不给我打电话。

Peter is hardly ever late.彼得几乎不迟到。

【拓展】

频率副词的比较：

always(100%)usually(80%)often(30%-50%)

sometimes(20%) hardly ever(5%) never(0%)

(1)汤姆几乎不做运动。Tom hardly ever takes(take)exercise.

(2)平时，他几乎不在家。He is hardly everat home on weekdays.

(3)—I saw you come to schoolby bus this morning.

—Oh，I __B__ come to school by bus，but it is raining today.

A.usually B.hardlyever C.sometimes

Task2Let\'slisten to the tape and finish 1b，2a，2b.

Task3Makeconversations and interview.

How often多久一次

用来提问动作发生的频率。如：

—How often do you go to the library?你多久去一次图书馆?

—Once a week.一周一次。

【备注】

我们学过的有关how的疑问词组：

how old多少岁

how much问不可数名词的数量多少

how many问可数名词的数量多少

how far多远

how long多久;多长

八年级英语上册课件 篇9

How do you make a banana smoothie？教案示例 I. 学习目标 1．学会描述混合饮料、沙拉、三明治等食品的制作程序。 2．学会区分可数名词和不可数名词及如何表示量。 3．学会写菜谱。 4．学会描述某个过程。 II. 学习向导 语言目标 学习策略与思维技巧 重点词汇 How do you make…? Peel the bananas. How many apples do we need? How much milk do we need? First, cut up the bananas. Then, … 通过对话练习，巩固所学知识。 通过上下文进行逻辑排序。 通过合作学习，启发思维，培养动手能力与合作精神。 first, next, then, finally cut up, peel, put, mix up, turn on salad, sandwich, hamburger watermelon, lettuce, onion, turkey, relish honey, mayonnaise, 语言结构 语言功能 跨学科学习可数名词和不可数名词 How many/How much 问句 叙述过程的词： first, next, then, finally 谈论自己喜爱的食物 描述制作食物的过程 社会实践：制作食物 文化：了解其他国家的饮食文化。 III．疑点、难点解析 1．cut：切，割，剪，割破；cut up：切碎，粉碎，捣毁。 如： I cut my finger when I cooked dinner yesterday. 昨天我做晚饭时割破了手指。 The butcher cut up the meat. 屠夫把肉切碎. 2．可数名词和不可数名词量的表示方法。特别注意不可数名词要加表示容器或体积大小的名词，与of构成短语才能表示量。 如： a piece of paper， two teaspoons of cinnamon，a cup of yogurt，a bar of chocolate 3．add…to 把…加到…上。 如: If you add 5 to 6, you get 11. 五加六得十一。 4．在描述一件事情的先后顺序时，恰当地使用副词first、next、then 和 finally，既能使说话人喘口气，又能使听话者感到句子的连贯性。 IV. 补充的词汇 1．碟子 dish 7. 苏打水 soda 13. 酱油 sauce 2．盘子 plate 8. 奶油 cream 14. 香油 sesame oil 3．汤匙 spoon 9. 桃 peach 15. 黄油 butter 4．刀子 knife 10. 梨 pear 16. 色拉油 salad oil 5．叉子 fork 11. 葡萄 grape 17. 花生酱 peanut butter 6．打蛋器 egg beater 12. 草莓 strawberry 18. 芝麻酱 sesame paste   V. 能力训练 一、补全对话 A: Let’s______ fruit salad. B: OK, good idea. How ______cinnamon _____we need? A: One teaspoon. B: And how _______ apples do we need? A: Let me think… We ______two apples. B: OK, and how much mayonnaise do we need? A: Two teaspoons should ______enough. 二、重新安排下面句子的'顺序，使其成为一个完整的对话。 1. I’m hungry. Let’s make a fruit smoothie. 2. What else do we need? 3. Two teaspoons should do it. And we need two teaspoons of yogurt. 4. We need three. 5. How many bananas do we need? 6. That sounds good. What fruit do we need? 7. How much mayonnaise do we need? 8. OK, three bananas, two teaspoons of mayonnaise and two teaspoons of yogurt. 9. We need mayonnaise. 10. We need bananas. 三、选择填空。 1. You should ______ the bananas and put them in the blender. A. cut down B. cut up C. cut in 2. Mon, can I turn _____ the TV? I want to watch the soccer game. A. on B. offC. up 3. How _______ yogurt do you need? A. manyB. a little C. much 4. I need ______________. A. two slices of bread B. two slices bread C. two slice of bread 5. How ____ cups of milk do you drink every day? A. muchB. manyC. a little 四、根据句意，用括号中所给单词的适当形式填空。 1. How many ______ (teacher) are there in your school? 2. I have three _______( watch ). 3. There are some _______( orange) on the table. 4. I like _______(tomato) and _______ ( chicken). 5. How much _______( honey ) do we need? 6. Tina, let’s _________(make) fruit salad. 7. Oh, it ______(rain) last night, so the ground is wet now. 8. Tom is a little _________ ( strong) than Mike. 9. I think English is ________________(important) than any other subject. 10. My mother ________( take) the bus to work every day. 五、完形填空 The Right Place for the Reece Mr Reece worked on a farm. He and his wife grew a lot of things and they had some cows. Every day they worked hard 1 morning till night. One day, Mr Reece 2 his wife. “Let’s go to Portsmouth next Sunday. We can 3 a good lunch there and then we can go to the cinema.” His wife was very happy when she 4 this, because they always ate a lot, and she didn’t 5 cooking three times a day. They went to Portsmouth by plane and walked about 6 an hour. Then, when it was twelve o’clock, they wanted to 7 . They looked at four restaurants(饭店). In front of one restaurant, they 8 a notice(公告). It read, “Lunch: 12:30 to 2:30, 1.5 pounds.” “Well, that’s 9 ,” Mrs Reece said. “We can eat for two hours for 1.5 pounds here! This is 10 for us.” 1. A. at B. from C. in D. on 2. A. told to B. asked C. spokeD. said to 3. A. cookB. smellC. haveD. buy 4. A. heard from B. heard of  C. heard   D. listened 5. A. thinkB. wish C. wantD. like 6. A. for B. by C. at D. in 7. A. have a rest   B. have lunch C. take a bus D. go home 8. A. saw B. heard C. watched D. looked for 9. A. terrible  B. well C. badD. great 10.A. the news   B. the thing C. the place D. the shop 六、书面表达 下周末，同学们准备开一次聚会，在聚会上，大家想自己动手制作一些喜欢吃的东西，许多同学爱吃水果沙拉，你会做吗？请你根据下面所给的材料，写出制作水果沙拉的过程。 three bananas, three apples， a watermelon， a bowl， cinnamon， yogurt. _________________________________________________________________ __________________________________________________________________ _________________________________________________________________ __________________________________________________________________ _________________________________________________________________ __________________________________________________________________ VI. Culture(文化): 1. How to keep table manners: * Fingers: We eat with chopsticks, forks, knives and spoons. But we eat some foods with fingers. For example: grapes, pizza, fries and fried chicken. * Elbow: Where do you put your elbows when you are eating? Remember to keep them off the table. * Mouth: Chew with your mouth closed. 2. Eating habit: * Indian use hands to eat meals, southerners use two hands when they are eating, but the northerner just use the left hand to eat. * Arab families use only the first three fingers of the right hand to eat. * American people don’t like to eat up all food when they are eating, they believe that will bring them bad luck and it’s rude. 3. 白族筷子趣话筷子： 白族人民对筷子的偏爱，不仅和其他民族一样在生活中离不开它，而且还形成了独特的习俗。一般请客吃饭，用一般的竹筷子。而在婚礼上使用的筷子，一律都用红颜色染就加工的竹筷子。因此，主人家在婚庆之前要砍回一些竹子请人加工削成筷子，然后用红颜色染红。这一是取红为吉利，二则是借用红字的谐音，取“和睦”之意。而前来参加喜庆婚宴的客人都要把自己使用的那双红筷子带回家、借主人家喜庆庆贺自家“和和气气”、“和睦相处。因而要准备多很多的＂红筷子＂。有趣的是新媳妇吃饭要用十多双红筷子扎成一把吃饭，据说这是图多子的意思。 答案及简析 一、 A: Let’s make fruit salad. B: OK, good idea. How much cinnamon do we need? A: One teaspoon. B: And how many apples do we need? A: Let me think… We need two apples. B: OK, and how much mayonnaise do we need? A: Two teaspoons should be enough. 二、 1 6 10 5 4 2 9 7 3 8 三、 1. B cut up有: 切碎，粉碎，捣毁 的意思. 2. A turn on 的意思是: 打开(电视机) 3. C yogurt是不可

八年级英语上册课件 篇10

-第一学期 二次备课                                         三年级英语上册第三单元  Let’s paint 教学设计 第一课时 教学内容：A：Let’s learn, Let’s do, Let’s draw 教学目标： 1、能听说、认读blue, green, yellow, red, purple 这些表示颜色的单词。 2、 能听懂所接触的指示语，并能按照指示语做出相应的动作。 3、通过学生认读的方法给小丑涂色，并复习头部的部位和颜色的名称。 教学重点：学习表示颜色的单词blue, green, yellow, red, purple  教学难点：green一词的 gr 发音较难，教师要多带读。 教学准备： 1、教师和学生都准备红、黄、蓝、绿、紫色的蜡笔。 2、本课时录音带。 预习提纲：   1、对照单本图示，找出单词的汉语意思。 2、查找下列单词的汉语意思： face  nose  eyes  mouth  ear 教学过程 ： （一）Warm---up （热身及预习展示） 1、教师放hello 歌曲，师生同唱。 2、检查学生预习情况。 （二）Presentation and  practice（精讲点拨） 1、教师出示彩笔，让学生了解颜色单词。学习颜色单词：教师出示蜡笔向学生介绍 This is a green crayon 之后，强调 green ，教师代读green 。其后，以此类推，教学blue 、yellow, red, purple。 2、用blue, green, yellow, red, purple 的单词卡片和颜色卡片再次讲授单词。学生适当跟读。 注意：green一词的发音较难，教师要多带读，引导学生感悟发音，从而了解英语的语音语调的知识。 3、让学生听录音，跟读Lets learn 部分的词汇，边听边读，边认读边指图，做到眼、手、口、耳、心的结合。 4、听录音，做Lets do 部分的游戏。 （三）Consolidation and extension（拓展延伸） 做 Lets paint 部分的练习： 教师手中拿蜡笔，边说边演示，如：Colour the face yellow. 就将小丑的脸涂成黄色。演示时教师的动作要慢点，让学生看清楚，强调动作 Colour 。最后，教师指着句子，带读Colour the face  二次备课                                         yellow. ，让学生跟读的同时也指着自己书上的句子。最后边读边在 做动作。用同样的方法进行第二句。 （四）Sum-up（总结） 教师：我们这节课主要学习了什么内容？请学生回答总结。 （五）The limited―time  exercise （限时作业） 教师下发限时作业，请学生独立完成。 （六）Check and  explain（检查限时作业并反馈） 集体进行作业的讲评，学生相互交换进行批改，教师进行等级评价。   第二课时 教学内容：A：Let’s talk, Let’s play, Let’s sing 教学目标： 1、能听懂、会说How are you?  Fine，thank you. 问候语，并能在实际情景中准确运用。要求模仿正确，语调自然。 2、通过创设实际情景，让学生能在相应的情景中准确运用以上句型。   3、学习本课时的有关颜色的.歌曲。 教学重、难点： 1、How are you? 的得体运用。 2、Fine, thank you.中 fine 一词字母 i 的发音不容易到位。 教学准备：本课时教学配套的录音带、预习提纲、限时作业 预习提纲：   1、问答练习连线 Good morning. Nice to meet you,too. Good  afternoon.  Good morning. Nice to meet you.  Good  afternoon. 2、观看图意，找出Miss Green,Mr Black,Miss White. 教学过程 ： （一）Warm---up （热身及预习展示） 1、师生同唱歌曲 Hello。教师可以边唱边用手势示意学生，将歌曲中的人名改为同班同学的名字。 2、进行预习展示。 （二）Presentation and  practice（精讲点拨） 1、师生观看教学插图。利用课本插图，使学生一目了然，既了解了句型的含义，又了解句型运用的情景。 2、教师提问：Mr. Black 和Miss Green 是怎样用英语打招呼的。能力强的学生或学过英语的学生尝试性的说 How are you? Fine,  thank you. 二次备课                                         3、录音展示，学生听录音跟读对话。 4、做Lets play 部分的活动，教师让学生按教材的方法两人一小组的活动，两人相互击掌问好，如： S1: Hi/Hello/Good morning, A . How are you? S2: Im fine./Fine, thank you.  在同桌练习之后，两人一组练习。 5、学唱歌曲 Who is wearing yellow today? 方法为： 教师带读歌曲中的单词和句子。 教师带领学生边打节拍边说歌词。 听录音，试唱歌曲。 （三）Consolidation and extension（拓展延伸） 学生分角色练习、表演Let’s talk部分对话。 （四）Sum-up（总结） 教师：我们这节课主要学习了什么内容？请学生回答总结。 （五）The limited―time  exercise （限时作业） 教师下发限时作业，请学生独立完成。 （六）Check and  explain（检查限时作业并反馈） 集体进行作业的讲评，学生相互交换进行批改，教师进行等级评价。 第三课时 教学内容：B：Let’s learn, Let’s do, Let’s chant 教学目标： 1、 听说、认读white, black, brown, pink, orange这些表示颜色的单词。 2、能听懂本课时所接触的指示语，并做出相应的动作。 3、复习颜色单词，学习本课歌谣，进一步让学生了解英 语的语音语调。 教学重点：表示颜色单词white, black, brown, pink, orange的学习。 教学难点：white 一词中元音字母 i发的音不易到位，black, brown  的发音也较难，且学生不易区分。 教学准备： 1、 教师准备一个用硬纸壳制作的颜色转盘，和用硬纸壳制作的小雨伞。 2、 教师准备有颜色的纸板制作的指令牌。 预习提纲： 1、对照单本图示，找出单词的汉语意思。 2、Let’s chant部分，在同学或家长的指导下试读，将不懂的句子标记下来。 二次备课                                         教学过程 ： （一）Warm---up （热身及预习展示） 1、师生相互问候 T: Hello,/Hi,/Good morning,/Good afternoon, boys and girls. S: Hello,/Hi,/Good morning,/Good afternoon, teacher. T: How are you? S: Fine, thank you. 2、检查学生预习情况。 （二）Presentation and  practice（精讲点拨） 1、教师让学生拿出蜡笔和水彩笔，学习black, brown, pink,  orange 。方法：教师举起粉色水彩笔或蜡笔说：Pink, pink, this  is pink. 边说边举，边听边看，训练学生手、脑、口、心、眼协调统一的能力。注意 black, brown 的发音，适当提示，切忌盲目纠音。 2、利用颜色卡片，教师再次带读 white, black, brown, pink,  orange ，提示 white, black, brown 的发音。 3、学生听Lets learn 的录音，指着书上的图跟读。边说边指，边听边看，也训练了学生手、脑、口、心、眼协调统一的能力。 4、让学生听Lets do部分的录音，根据录音做动作，说到颜色时就手中举起蜡笔，左右会懂。 5、教师播放Lets chant部分的录音，学生试说。 （三）Consolidation and extension（拓展延伸） 游戏 BINGO  教师让学生将自己喜欢的9种颜色的蜡笔，按三行三列的方法摆在桌面上，教师任意说颜色，学生如果听到教师说到自己所摆的蜡笔的颜色，则在蜡笔上放一小张纸片，当摆出的纸片，有三个成为一条线时说：BINGO ，为游戏的胜利者。 （四）Sum-up（总结） 教师：我们这节课主要学习了什么内容？请学生回答总结。 （五）The limited―time  exercise （限时作业） 教师下发限时作业，请学生独立完成。 （六）Check and  explain（检查限时作业并反馈） 集体进行作业的讲评，学生相互交换进行批改，教师进行等级评价。 第四课时 教学内容：A：Let’s talk, Let’s play, Let’s check 教学目标：  1 、能听懂、会说表示赞成别人提议的感叹语Great！并能在实际情景中恰当的运用。 二次备课                                         2、复习巩固所学问候语、打招呼用语及自我介绍用语，并在 A 部分 Lets talk 会话学习的基础上，增加 Im fine. Thank you. / Very well,  thanks. 等对问候的多种回答语。 3、做本课的听力练习，训练听力的同时检查学生对本课内容的掌握情况。 教学重点：学习 Lets talk部分对话。 教学难点：表示赞成别人提议的感叹语Great！和 How are you?的答语 Very well, thanks. 的发音不易到位，教师要适当

八年级英语上册课件 篇11

Unit1 Where did you go on vacation

2，掌握重点句型：Where did you go on vacation?

Did you go anywhere interesting?

1. 任何人______________________2. 任何地方____________________3.精彩的__________________

4.很少____________________ 5.大多数_____________________6. 某物;某事__________________

7.没有什么____________________8.每人___________________9.我自己__________________________

10. 你自己____________________11. 母鸡_________________12.猪_____________________________

13.好像______________________14.厌烦的___________________15.某人_________________________

1. 相当多____________________2. 去度假___________________3.为考试而学_________________

4.照相____________________5.购物_____________________6.记日记__________________________

7.当然__________________8.夏令营_________________9.出去___________________________

10.第一次______________________11.在农村_________________________

【合作探究】请预习1单元 Section A 的内容，掌握并完成下列知识。

一. anyone 意为____________. 是指人不定代词。某人________, 每个人_________, 没有人__________. 当形容词修饰不定代词时，要后置。

Eg: 1. Is there ________at home? 有人在家吗?

2. Is there _________ _________ in school today? 今天学校有重要的人吗?

【扩展】:不定代词还有指物不定代词：某件事(东西)___________, 任何事(东西)_________, 所有事(东西)_____________，没有事(东西)______________.

还有一些副词：任何地方_________, 某个地方____________, 每个 地方____________,无处__________.

归类：当形容词修饰这些不定代词和副词时， 要______________.

Eg: 1. You can go ________ _________, if you like. 如果你喜欢，你可以去任何有趣的地方。

2. I want to tell you _________ ________ about my vacation.我想告诉你有关我假期的一些特殊的事情。

二. few 意为__________, 修饰___________名词, 倾向于否定。

固定搭配：_____________.修饰_________________名词. 倾向于肯定。

little 意为_____________,修饰___________名词, 倾向于否定。

固定搭配：_____________.修饰_________________名词. 倾向于肯定。

quite a few 表示相当多， 修饰___________名词。quite a little表示相当多，修饰__________名词.

Eg: 1. Tom is happy be cause he has _______ _______ friends here. 汤姆很开心因为他在这有一些朋友。

2. ______people like talking with the bad boy. 很少人愿意和那个坏孩子说话。

3. There is _______ ______milk left in the bottle. 瓶子里还剩一点牛奶。

4. There is _______ food in the fridge and you should buy some. 冰箱里几乎没食物了，你应该买一些。

5. There are ______ _____ ______people at the us stop waiting for the bus.公共汽车站有很多人在等车。

6. There’s still _______ ___ ______ milk in the cup. 杯子里仍然有不少牛奶。

三.most adj. _________. most 修饰名词，most of+名词，意为：大部分…,作主语时谓语动词的单复数取决于名词的单复数。

Eg: 1. _______ ________ are studying English hard now. 现在大多数学生都在努力学习英语。

2. I think most of the food ________ (be) delicious.

四.myself 意为：___________. 是反身代词，在句中作同位语或宾语。其它反身代词，我自己:_______,你自己：_______, 他自己_________，她自己________，它自己________，我们自己________，你们自己___________他们自己___________.

固定短语：teach myself 我自学 enjoy oneself 过得愉快 by myself 我亲自…

I. 单项选择。

( )1. ---Kate, I’m going on business. Please look after _______well. ---Don’t worry, Mom. I will.

A. herself B. myself C. yourself D. himself

( )2. I’d like to go _____________ on vacation.

A. nowhere interesting B. interesting anywhere C. somewhere interesting D. interesting somewhere

( )3. ----How was your weekend? ----Very good! I ______the Science Museum with my classmates.

A. visit B. visited C. am visiting D. will visit

( )4. She is new here, so we know ______ about her.

A. nothing B. something C. anything D. everything

( )5. I can’t find my watch, but it must be ______in this room.

A. everywhere B. nowhere C. anywhere D. somewhere

( )6. Everyone ______I come form Sichuan. Actually(事实上), I come from S handong.

A. find B. think C. finds D. thinks

( )7. ---Did you have a good weekend? ---______. We enjoyed ourselves in the park .

A. I’m afraid not B. I don’t think so C. Of course D. I hope not

( )8. ----Where is my notebook? ---I don’t know. It isn’t here. Maybe _____took it away by mistake.(错误)

A. everybody B. nobody C. anybody D. somebody

( )9. ----How was your trip? ----______. I hope I can go there again.

A. Just so-so B. Not very good C. Nothing special D. Wonderful

( )10. He is a famous(的) cook. This dish tastes ______.

A. very well B. good C. well D. bad

II. 用词的正确形式填空。

1. More and more __________(visit) come to visit China these years.

2. I’m going to go _______(shop) for clothes at the Fashion Parade Store today.

3. The farmer keeps 50 p_______ on the farm every year.

4. It was raining hard. But I left my u__________ at school.

5. Health depends on good food and e_________sleep.

III. 用方框中词的适当形式填空。feed, anything, of course, buy, work

6. Do you have___________ important to say?

7. My father _________me an interesting storybook yesterday.

8. They picked leaves from the tree, and ______them to some little white worms.(虫子)

9. However cold it was, we still went on ________.

10. ---Do you feel like going to see a movie? ----___________.

Unit1 Where did you go on vacation第2课时

2，掌握重点句型：Where did you go on vacation?

Did you go anywhere interesting?Did you go out with anyone?

【课前预习】预习Section A, 提炼以下词组。

1. 待在家里 ________________ 2. 去纽约_________________3. 去参加夏令营___________________

4. 去山区___________________ 5. 去动物园 ________________6. 和其他人一起去________________

7. 买一些特别的东西_____________________8. 遇到一些有趣的人______________________________

9. 好久不见__________________10. 好多照片________________11. 大部分时间__________________

12. 黄果树瀑布__________________13. 喂鸡__________________14. 一些小猪仔_________________

15. 现在再见吧!_________________16. 记日记________________17. 没有人____________________

I.No one was here. 译：_______________________.

no one意思：________.与no body同义，做主语时，谓语动词用__________形式。且不能与of连用。

none意为没有，既指人又指物，可与of连用。谓语单，复形式皆可。none可做答语，表示一个没有。

Eg: (1) No one ___________(知道) the answer to the question.

(2) _________went swimming last weekend because of the bad weather.

A. Someone B. No one C. Everyone D. Nothing

(3) ---How many books do you have? ----_______.A. No one B. No a C. No body D. None

(4) _____of the students knows what Mr Brown likes. A. No one B. None C. Someone D. Anyone

2. Still no one seemed to be bored. 译:_______________________________.

seem是系动词。意为：____________. seem后接名词，形容词作表语。Seem like…似乎像…

Eg: (1). It ________(seem) a lovely cat. 它看来是只可爱的猫。

(2) You _________very _________. 你好像很生气。

( 3) It _________ a _______ ______.这好像是个好主意。

(4)That funny actor ______ ________ a clown(小丑)。那个滑稽的演员似乎像个小丑。

【知识链接】seem to do sth 似乎要、好像要做某事 It seems that…似乎、看起来…

Eg: (1). He seems ________ ______ ______./ It _______ ______ he is sad. 他似乎很伤心。

(2) The girl seems ____ ______ her homework on time./ It ______ _____ she finishes her homework on time.

3 I just stayed at home most of the time to read and relax. 译：_________________________________.

此句中，to read and relax 做___________成分。及动词不定式在句中做状语。

Eg: (1). Many visitors come to China __________(visit) the Great Wall.

(2). My sister often goes to the Children’s Palace __________(learn) the piano.

(3.) My family want to the countryside _________(see) my grandma last weekend.

4. Why didn’t you buy anything for yourself? 译：_____________________________________.

Why don’t/doesn’t/didn’t+人称+do…? = Why not do…? 表示某人为什么不做某事呢，是一种建议。

Eg: (1) _______ _______ _______go home with me?= ________ ______go home with me?

(2) Why not _______ for a walk after dinner? A. go B. goes C. to go D. going

【拓展】表示建议的句型：What about ….? How about…? Let’s do…。

翻译：你为什么不读书呢?Why don’t you________ ________? Why not _______ _______?

Let’s _______ _______. What about _________ __________? How about _______ _______?

I. 单项选择。

( )1. ----How many birds can you see in the tree? ----_____. All the birds have flown away.

A. None B. No one C. Nothing D. A few

( )2. The pizza ______good. I’d like some more. A. turns B. sounds C. feels D. tastes

( )3. ---Hi, Betty. Your skirt looks beautiful.---______.

A. Oh, really? B. Oh, no C. Don’t say that D. Thanks a lot.

( )4.---- Jack, is there _______in today’s newspaper? ---No, nothing.

A. anything important B. something important C. important anything D. important something

( )5. After a long walk in the sun, they wanted to drink _______.

A. cold something B. something cold C. nothing cold D. cold anything

( )6. ---Bob,it’s getting cold outside. _____take a jacket? ---Ok, mom.

A. Why do you B. Why not C. Why did you D. Why not do you

( )7. ---I feel tired and sleepy. ----Why not stop______for a while?A. rest B. to rest C. resting D. rested

( )8. She is ____ busy, and she has not finished her work______.

A. still; still B. yet; still C. still; yet D. yet; yet

( )9. ____that they didn’t know the news.A. It seems B. It seemed C. They seem D.They seemed

( )10. Everything for her ______not important. A. are B. is C. am D. be

( )11. ____of them like playing chess because it’s too difficult.

A. None B. No one C. Someone D. Anyone

Thousands of years ago. There was a very clever king with the name of Soloman. There are many stories about him. Here is one of them which shows how clever he was. Once there were two women. They lived in the same house, and each had a baby. One night, one of the babies died, and its mother took the other woman's child, and put it in her own bed instead (代替). The next morning they had a quarrel(吵架). ”No, this is my child, the dead one is yours, “ said the other. Each one wanted the living baby, but no one could tell whom it belonged to(属于) So they went to see King Solomon. When King Solomon heard their story, he said, ”Bring me a knife, cut the child in two, and give each woman one half. “ ”That's very fair(公平), oh, bright King!“ said the dead baby's mother. ”Give her my child, let it be hers, but don't kill the child. Oh, King!“ cried the other woman in tears(流泪). Then King Solomon pointed to the woman in tears and said, ”Give the child to her, for she is its mother. "

1. The two women in the same house each had a child. ( )

2. One night the two babies died. ( )

3. The two women quarreled(吵架) because Solomon killed their babies. ( )

4. Solomon came to see the mothers after their babies died. ( )

5. King Solomon cut the living child in two and gave each woman one half. ( )

七年级下册英语课件(热门八篇)

教案课件是老师上课做的提前准备，因此想要随便写的话老师们就要注意了。 写好教案课件有助于教学时，避免发生意外状况，怎么样的教案才算是好教案课件？在这里工作总结之家的编辑提供了一篇涉及“七年级下册英语课件”的文章供大家参考，请您仔细阅读本页内容发现更多的精彩！

七年级下册英语课件【篇1】

教学目标：

1、掌握表示地点的词汇;

2、掌握where 引导的特殊疑问句;

3、能够简单地描述地点方位;

4、能够画出简单的示意图。

教学向导：

语言目标

学习策略与思维技巧

重点词汇

表示地点的词汇

where 引导的特殊疑问句

个体、群体思维;

看图作答;

交换信息;

Post office; library; hotel...

Between; on; next to;across from...

语言结构

语言功能

跨学科学习

There be 句型

Where句型的问答

询问路线

指出方位

通过绘画激发学生学习兴趣

教学过程设计：

Steps

Teacher's activity

Students' activity

Preparation

Brain storm

Look at some pictures and know the words of these places

Look and read and learn

Ppt.

Task I pair work: Is there ....

Aim

Use 'there be' sentences, familiar with the new words

1

Read and match the new words in 1a

Read and finish the work

Picture

2

Show the target language:

Is there a bank near here?

Look at the sentence and the answer

3

Ask Ss to talk about the places in the picture

Pair work to talk about the places and streets

Pair work

4

Move around the room and give support as needed

Talk to each other

5

Ask pairs of students to show their works

Pairs of Ss show their works

Check out the conversations

Task II Listening comprehensions

Aim

Familiar with the prepositions in the sentences

1

Look at the picture in 2a and explain the prepositions

Look and learn

Write on the blackboard

2

Listen to the tape for two times

Fill in the blanks and know the meaning

Recorder

3

Move around the room and give support as needed

Write down the answer

4

Check the answer and point out the mistakes

Check the answers

Task III group work: our school

Aim

Use the target language and familiar with our school and places

1

Teach some more words to the Ss and read

Learn the new words

Pictures

2

Ask Ss to draw a picture of our school and to introduce it

Draw the picture

3

Move around the room and give support as needed

Discuss in groups and finish the picture

4

Ask Ss to show their works and talk about it

Introduce their works

Task IV pair work: talk about the pictures

Aim

Use 'where' question, and know how to answer it.

1

Target language: where is the bank?

Learn the sentences

2

Ask Ss to talk about the pictures

Pair work to talk about the places

Ss' pictures or the picture in 1a

3

Move around the room and give support as needed

Discuss in pairs and

4

Ask Ss to show their works and perform it

Show the conversation with the picture

Homework

Draw a picture of your neighborhood and write a short passage to introduce it

教学反思：本单元的主题是方位，所以很多地点的名词是学生单词突破的重点，与学生的生活相结合，要扩充一些词汇，如学校的教学楼、操场，社区里的饭店、医院等，让学生学到的句子能够用的灵活。介词表示的方位应该讲解清楚，这样学生才能更加明确的表述各个建筑所处的位置。这些知识不能死板的传授，一定要在任务中完成，让学生不知不觉地学习目标语言。图片的展示能给学生更立体的感受，更加明确空间位置关系。运用画图的辅助形式，激发学生的兴趣，能够达到更好的效果。

频道小编推荐： |

七年级下册英语课件【篇2】

前言

《教学案例设计》一书是在仔细研究《Project English》学生用书、教师用书、《英语课程标准》的基础上编写的。以学生，教师和教学的实际为出发点，解读教学目标，创设教学情境，提供教学素材，节省老师备课时间，易于操作。其活动设计注重交际，符合学生认知规律。案例的课堂资源丰富多彩，形式多样，可以满足不同地区的实际需要。

● 整体特色

本书严格按照《Project English》学生用书的流程编写，一课一例。每节课设计为45分钟，可根据实际适当调整。我们以行之有效的五指教学方案为编写模式。其中台词用英语；场景、活动说明、补充材料、文化意识、注意事项等放在括号内用汉语表达。五指教学方案分为五步，标注时间建议。

Step 1 Review 第一步 复习（时间：-分钟）

导入本课新词句。可以用课本上的图片、教具、chant、歌曲、游戏、直观表演等复习导入本课新词句，既活跃课堂气氛，引起学生兴趣，又体现建构主义理论，学生的经验是学习的重要基础。激活学生先前的知识和经验，为进一步探究找好最近发展区打基础，引出本课新词句。

Step 2 Presentation 第二步 呈现 （时间：-分钟）

呈现对话或短文等本section重点活动的情景。找出关键词句，目标语言，为交际积累材料。理顺思路，为下一步在用中学打基础。下面步骤中的交际不只是死记硬背，而是灵活运用，在用中学。

Step 3 Consolidation第三步 巩固 （时间：-分钟）

语音、语调练习。看第二步中找出的关键词，不看课本，模仿原文对话。所有学生分组互相检查。

Step 4 Practice 第四步 练习（时间：-分钟）

呈现书上其他活动，在不同情景中练习目标语言，展开任务型活动。在用中巩固和学会使用目标语言。

Step 5 Project 第五步 综合探究活动 （时间：-分钟）

让学生用本课所学词句展开活动，锻炼学生语言综合运用能力和探究能力，体现学了就用的原则。有活动产品。对学生提出的要求非常具体。

● 编写特点

本书各单元列出了教学目标。各案例以section为编写单位。每个section包含如下内容：

首先指出了各section的重点活动，即本课呈现的重点内容。然后是

一、教学目标：用英语分类呈现本section教学目标。

二、教具：考虑不同地区实际情况，可以有多种选择。

三、五指教学方案

另外， 我们在编写的过程中，为了操作方便，统一了格式，现说明如下：

S-Student,

Ss-Students

T -Teacher

S1-Student 1

S2-Student 2

最后，我们诚挚地感谢长期以来大力支持我们的广大师生们。本书是设计者和撰稿人的精心奉献，意在给您提供一份建议。希望能够抛砖引玉，激发您的灵感。但是由于水平有限，加之时间仓促，疏漏与错误也是在所难免的。我们期待着您的关心，也期待着您的批评和指正。

北京市仁爱教育研究所

Unit 5

教学目标

语

言

知

识 类别 内 容 课次 要求

语音 // // /t/ /d/ /ts/ /dz/ /tr/ /dr/ /l/ /m/ /n/ //

词

汇 wake，early, first，day, term，must, still, by，on foot, the same to, usually, always，Ms., boat，ship，sea，train，by plane/air/airplane 1A 掌

握

weekday，around，bird，catch，walk，never，sometimes，ride，park, game, late, weekend 1B

guest，life，almost，bicycle，break, finish，spare，basketball，football，read,story，clean, dance，piano，library, once，twice, week, listen，music, write，supermarket 1C

pleasure，volleyball，while 1D

playground，lab，room，gym，classroom，building，pool，thing, card，motorcycle，road， physics 2A

most, better, minute, shelf, great, dear, borrow, course, keep, return, post, newspaper, purse, money，anything，else, nothing, meal, umbrella 2B

plan, next to, near, upstairs, news, attention, between, movie, show, hall, program, gone, wind, activity, stamp, world 2C

traffic, child, exercise，Japanese，the Great wall, wonderful 2D

Wednesday，end, period，Monday，Tuesday，Thursday，Friday，history, art, math, noon, geography, P.E, meeting, how many, lesson, subject, draw, learn 3A

question，Australia，easy，interesting，difficult，boring 3B

answer, joke，funny，interest，everyday,science，useful，hard,wish 3C

wash, restaurant 3D

subway 1A 理

解

worm 1B

reporter，Net Bar, roller skating 1C

measure 1D

dining hall，dormitory 2A

bookstore，workbook，project, certainly, lost and found 2B

poster, collection 2C

partner, happily 2D

timetable, biology, politics, outdoor 3A

editor, column, writer 3C

novel 3D

语

言

知

识 类别 内 容

语

法 1. 一般现在时（Simple present）

2. 频度副词（Adverbs of frequency）

never，seldom，sometimes，often，usually，always，once，twice

3. 现在进行时（Present continuous）

I’m looking for a book.

Are you doing your homework? Yes， I am./No， I’m not.

Is he/she...? Yes， he/she is./No， he/she isn’t.

What are you doing now? I’m playing computer games.

What is he/she doing? He/She is...

功能和话题 1. 论交通方式（Talking about means of transport）

How do you usually go to school? I usually go to school by bike.

2. 采访（Interviews）

Our guest today is Michael from Class 2， Grade 1.

3. 谈论日常生活（Talking about routines）

4. 学校建筑（School buildings）

swimming pool， playground， library， dormitory， lab， canteen， gym

5. 谈论兴趣喜好（Talking about interests， likes and dislikes）

I like the swimming pool best. Why do you like English? Because it’s interesting and

easy.

6. 借物（Borrowing things）

How long can I keep it? Two weeks.

7. 新闻（News）、海报（Poster）

Attention， please! Here is the news.

8. 谈论学校活动、科目和时间表（Talking about school activities， subjects and timetable）

9. 谈论学校生活（Talking about school life）

Topic 1

Section A

The main activities are 1 and 3a. 本课重点活动是1 and 3a。

Ⅰ.Teaching aims and demands 教学目标

1. （1）Talk about means of transport:

on foot， by bus， by car， by bike， by plane/air/airplane, by train， by subway， by boat/ship/sea

（2）Learn adverbs of frequency:

usually， always

2. Learn the simple present tense:

How do you usually go to school?

I usually go to school by bike.

3.Talk about how to go to school:

Do you often come to school by bike?

Yes, I do.

How do you usually come to school?

I usually come to school by subway.

I always come to school by bus.

Ⅱ.Teaching aids 教具

关于交通工具的玩具/教学图片/简笔画/课件（任老师挑选）

Ⅲ.Five瞗inger Teaching Plan 五指教学方案

Step 1 Review第一步 复习（时间：10分钟）

1.（师生互动复习旧问候语。）

T： Good morning， class.

Ss：Good morning， Miss...／Mr. ...

T： Welcome back to school， boys and girls. I’m very glad to see you again.

Ss：Me， too.

（找一学生协助呈现新问候语“新年好”的答语。）

T： Happy New Year! 新年好！

S： The same to you! 新年好！

（板书如下：）

Happy New Year! 新年好！

The same to you! 新年好！

（全班分两大组，先按左右分组，然后男女分组互相用上面的对话打招呼。）

T： Boys and girls. Happy New Year!

Ss： The same to you!

Group A: Happy New Year!

Group B: The Same to you!

Boys： Happy New Year， girls!

Girls： The same to you!

（重新分两大组。）

Group A： Happy New Year!

Group B： The same to you!

2.（复习上学期的时间表达法，导入本课重点:交通工具的使用。）

T： What time is it? What’s the time?

Oh， it’s seven o’clock. It’s time to go to school.

I usually go to school by bike／bus／subway...

（板书所有的交通工具的名词，把玩具拿出来或把教学图片挂在黑板上，或用简笔画画出几种交通工具来。）

by bus by car on foot

by bike by boat by plane/air/airplane

其它的：by train／subway／underground／ship

I usually go to school by bike／bus／car.

（从而引出本课重点句型，并板书在黑板上。）

A：How do you usually go to school?

B：I usually go to school on foot.

（过渡到下一步。）

Step 2 Presentation第二步 呈现（时间：5分钟）

1. (教师指导两人一组表演，复习原来对话，从而引出对话1。)

A: What time do you wake up?

B: I wake up at six.

A: How do you usually go to school?

B: By bike.

T: Do you know what time Kangkang gets up? Let’s learn 1.

2.（设置并板书听力任务，让学生带着任务听录音。）

What’s the time?

Is it time to get up?

Who wakes Kangkang up?

How does Kangkang go to school today?

（听录音，回答问题。）

T：Listen to the tape and answer the questions.

wake up--6∶50--get up--early--first day--by bike

（将关键词写在黑板上，呈现出1。）

Step 3 Consolidation第三步 巩固（时间：5分钟）

1.（老师放录音1，示范让学生跟读，用铅笔标重读与语调。）

T：Follow the tape and draw “up and down” with your pencil like this.

2.（老师让学生擦去所标重读与语调，先自读，然后跟录音一起读，逐句核对语音语调。）

T：Rub them clean and read and check your pronunciation sentence by sentence.Go!

3.（人机对话，即学生和录音机对话。）

T: You are mother， listen to Kangkang and make a dialog with him.

4.（看第二步呈现在黑板上的关键词，学生两人一组表演，不能看书，只能看关键词对话。）

T: Work in pairs. Close your book， look at the blackboard and act the dialog out.

Step 4 Practice第四步 练习（时间：15分钟）

1.（用图片或多媒体课件教交通工具，学生学习2。）

(方案a。)

T: Look at the pictures. Say the phrases.

（老师指导学生说。）

S: on foot/by bus/by car/by bike/by plane...

T: What time is it? It’s six o’clock. It’s time to wake up.

（然后两人一组练习下表方框内容和巩固新句型：一人做使用交通工具的动作，另一人猜并看黑板造句。然后交换角色。这样做可以鼓励学生进行合作学习，人人课堂机会均等，提高课堂效率。完成2。）

by bike by bus by plane on foot

Kangkang

Maria

Michael

Jane

A：Today is the first day of the new term.

B：Kangkang usually goes to school by bike.

A：Today is...

B：Maria...

(方案b。)

（利用多媒体课件，让学生听声音，猜交通工具。）

T: Listen to the sounds， please guess.

Ss: ...

T: OK! Look at the pictures in 2， read and match.

2.（让学生完成3a。）

T: Jane meets Kangkang and Sally. Listen and answer， how do Kangkang and Sally come to

school?

（让学生回答问题并看关键词分角色对话。板书如下。）

Kangkang-by bike Sally-by subway Jane-by bus

3.（让学生听，做4。）

T: Listen to the tape and match.

4.（两人一组表演对话。）

T: Work in pairs. Talk about how to go to school with your partner.

Step 5 Project第五步 综合探究活动（时间：10分钟）

1.（老师再次引用多媒体课件，这次只放flash动画，让学生自己展开想像的翅膀，任意造

句子，要用上交通工具的名词。）

T: Let’s look at the pictures. Are you interested in these lovely pictures? Yes， I know you do.

Please make some sentences as you like， and don’t forget to use these means of transport.

Are you ready? Go!

2.（做5。首先，让学生分四人组做一个调查报告How do you usually go to school?完成5。

然后全班集体调查，让几人问How many friends come to school on foot?／...每人问一种交通工具，每个学生按人数从多到少列成表格，最后随便抽向大家汇报。）

T: Please report your answer to your classmates.

S1: In our class， fifteen students go to school by bike.

S2: In our class， twenty students go to school by bus.

S3: ...

3.（弹性课堂，让学生互相猜测对方上学所使用的交通工具。）

T: Let’s guess. How does your partner go to school? Write it down and then report your answer

to your classmates. Who wants to say first?

S1: Li Ming usually goes to school by bike. I am right.

S2: I am wrong. Liu Li usually goes to school by bike. I guess she goes to school on foot.

4. Homework：

(1)（到社会上做调查，看有多少人使用何种交通工具，从多到少一一列表出来。）

(2) Write a passage: My Morning (不少于5个句子。)

(3) Preview Section B. Write down adverbs of frequency.

Section B

The main activities are 1,2 and 3a.本课重点活动是1,2和3a。

Ⅰ.Teaching aims and demands教学目标

1. Learn how to use adverbs of frequency:

never， sometimes

2. Learn the simple present tense:

I always get up at around six o’clock.

I often go to school by bike.

3. Talk about frequency:

（1）How does Maria go home?

She sometimes goes home by subway.

（2）I seldom walk to school.

I never go to school on foot.

Ⅱ. Teaching aids 教具

录音机/挂图/单词卡片／调查表

Ⅲ. Five瞗inger Teaching Plan 五指教学方案

Step 1 Review第一步 复习（时间：10分钟）

1. Words competition.

（1）A require answer.(必答题。)

T: Boys and girls. Let’s have words competition as usual. First require answer. Each student

two words. I’ll give you Chinese meaning， please say them in English. Row 1， begin!

boat， ship， sea， train， plane， air， usually， always， first，

term， early， wake， on foot， by plane， the same to， by subway

（2）A quick response.(抢答题。)

T：Good! Go on our quick response. If you know, you can stand up quickly. OK? Begin!

sometimes， never， seldom， weekday， around， bird， catch， walk， ride， park

（3）T：Well done， please read them together.

2.（利用头脑风暴法，在1分钟内，每组每位同学依次说出一种乘坐的交通工具，看哪组

同学说的最多，就获胜。）

T: Now I ‘ll give you one minute. Each of you says one kind of transportation. The group that

has the most will win.

3.（利用链条式发问即每竖排同学一个问，一个回答，接着转身问后面的同学，给每组2

分钟，看哪组在规定的时间说的最多，就获胜，问题是：How do you usually go to school?）

Example:

S1: How do you usually go to school?

S2: I usually go to school by bike. How do you usually go to school?

S3: I usually go to school by bus. How do you usually go to school?

S4: ...

4.（老师根据第3个环节的实际情况，导出1部分的语言功能目标，为下一步过渡做铺垫。）

T: Yeah. Now I know some of you go to school by bike, some of you go to school by bus. But

you know I always get up at around six o’clock. I often go to school on foot. But

sometimes I go to school by bike. I never go to school by bus.

Step 2 Presentation第二步 呈现（时间：5分钟）

（设置听力任务，让学生带着任务听录音，可以降低难度。）

T: Listen to the tape of 1 and find out some key words.

（再听一遍，找出关键词，为下一步的巩固做铺垫。）

around， weekday， bird， catch， worm， seldom， walk， never

（板书并英汉对照。）

Step 3 Consolidation第三步 巩固（时间：10分钟）

1.（1）（老师放录音1，示范让学生跟读，用铅笔标重读与语调。）

T: Follow the tape and draw “up or down” with your pencil like this.

（2）（老师让学生擦去所标重读与语调，先自读，然后跟录音一起读，逐句核对语音语调，

这样做可以使学生集中注意力，效率更高。）

T: Rub them clean and now read and check your pronunciation sentence by sentence. Go!

（3）（人机对话，即学生和录音机对话。这样能提高学生兴趣。）

T: You are Michael. Listen to Kangkang and make a dialog with Kangkang.

（4）（看第二步，呈现黑板上的关键词，学生两人一问一答，只看黑板上关键词对话。）

T: Work in pairs， close your book. Look at the blackboard and act the dialog out.

（5）（利用关键词进行造句。）

Example:

Seldom: I seldom go to school on foot.

...

2.（呈现2的图片，要求学生根据图片的意思，给每个频度副词造句。）

T: Look at the table， please make sentences by using these adverbs of frequency.

Step 4 Practice第四步 练习（时间：10分钟）

1.（呈现3a的图片，通过师生互动，进一步让学生了解和巩固语言知识。）

（1）T: Look at the first picture. What does Maria do?

S: Maria goes home by subway.

（通过谈论第2、3、4幅图，可以得到以下几个句子。）

Example:

Li Xiang goes to school by bike.

We go to the park on foot.

They go to the zoo by bus.

（2）（听录音，要求学生写句子。）

T: Listen to the tape and write down on the notebook.

Example:

Maria sometimes goes home by subway.

Li Xiang often goes to school by bike.

We usually go to the park on foot.

They always go to the zoo by bus.

（3）（核对答案。）

T: Now let’s check the answers together.

（4）（根据以上句子，进行回答。）

T: Then please ask and answer. You can do it like this:

A: How does Maria go home?

B: Maria sometimes goes home by subway. Are you clear? Begin!

（5）（呈现句子的同义替换，加深对乘坐交通工具方法的灵活运用。）

T: Look at this sentence again. Maria sometimes goes home by subway.

We also say: Maria sometimes takes the subway home.

But what about...

Ask students to do exercises and check the answers.

Keys to answers:

Li Xiang often rides a bike to school.

We usually walk to the park.

They always take the bus to the zoo.

（6）（总结归纳乘坐交通工具的用法。）

Example:

by bike:ride a bike by plane:fly to...

by bus:take a bus on foot:walk to...

by car: take a car by subway:take the subway

Step 5 Project第五步 综合探究活动（时间：10分钟）

1. Finish 4.

T:Make a survey of your partners and fill in the chart. Then report it to your class.

get up walk to school watch TV in

the evening do your

homework play computer

game shelp your

parents

always

usually

often

sometimes

seldom

never

A: Do you often watch TV in the evening?

B: No，I don’t. I sometimes watch TV. Sometimes I read books.

2.（呈现调查表，根据表格内容，写一段话，然后汇报。）

go shopping watch TV walk after supper get up early

I

Grandma

Grandpa

Father

Mother

T: Look at the table， please make a survey. You can fill in the blanks with the adverbs of

frequency. For example: seldom， always， sometimes， often...

3.（弹性课堂，要求学生背一句谚语。板书。）

Proverb.

Where there is will， there is a way.

4. Let’s chant 5.

T: At last let’s relax. Let’s chant together.

（在轻松活泼融洽的气氛中结束这节课。）

You go to work by bike.

He walks to school with Mike.

She comes here by plane.

They go there by train.

We are busy on weekdays.

Let’s be early as always.

5. Homework:

(1)（让学生写一篇有关自己的小短文，用上Section A和 Section B中学过的重点句型。

五句话左右。有兴趣，学生们可以课外收集中外古谚语，名人名言。培养他们的自主学习能力和自我构建能力。）

（2）（让学生收集有关中美学生学习生活的资料，看他们之间有什么不同，预习1a on page

5。）

SectionC

The main activities are 1a， 2 and 3.本课重点活动是1a， 2和3。

Ⅰ.Teaching aims and demands教学目标

1.（1）Learn adverbs of frequency:

once， twice

（2）Learn other useful words and expressions:

guest， life， almost, bicycle, break, finish， spare， basketball， football，read, story，

clean， dance， piano， library, week, listen， music, write, supermarket

2.（1）Learn the simple present tense:

I usually play computer games.

He usually reads story books.

Do you often read books in the library?

（2）-How often do you go to the library?

-Once/Twice/Three times a week/Very often/Every day/Seldom...

3. Talk about the school activities:

play computer games， read story books， clean the house， play soccer， go dancing， play

basketball， play the piano， sing songs

Ⅱ.Teaching aids教具

话筒/图片/录音机

Ⅲ. Five-finger Teaching Plan五指教学方案

Step 1 Review第一步 复习（时间：10分钟）

1.（复习Section B 5 Let’s chant，活跃课堂气氛。）

T: The whole class， let’s chant again.

（全班同学边唱边用双手打节拍。）

2.（复习上节课的交通工具。）

T: How do you usually go to school?

S1: I usually go to school on foot.

T: How do you usually go to school?

S2: I usually go to school by bike.

T: ...

3.（学生在小组里进行链式对话，继续复习交通工具。）

S1: How do you often go to school?

S2: I often go to school on foot. What about you?

S3: I often go to school by bike. How do you usually go to school?

S4: ...

4. (教师引导学生复习频度副词seldom, often, always,从而引出本节课的新词组how often和另几个频度副词once, twice...)

T: I always go to library after school.

Mr. Zhang doesn’t go to library every day, he goes there once a week.

(板书划线部分，学习新词once,用同样的方法讲解twice。)

T：How often do you go to library?(学习how often)

S：...

(板书划线部分，重点讲解how often的用法。)

T: Now, let’s use them to make dialogs.(指着黑板上的新词。)

5.（邀请一位同学扮演贵宾，老师扮演采访者进行采访，尽可能帮助学生。）

T: Now， I am an interviewer. Good morning， everyone! Our guest today is

Kangkang from Class 5， Grade 1. Hello， Kangkang!

Kangkang: Hello.

T: We want to know something about your school life. How do you usually get to

school?

Kangkang: I usually walk to school. But sometimes I go to school by bike.

T: Where do you have lunch?

Kangkang: I usually have lunch at school.

T: Do you sometimes eat out in school days?

Kangkang: No， I don’t.

T: Do you have a short break after lunch?

Kangkang: Yes， I do./No， I don’t.

T: What time do the classes finish in the afternoon?

Kangkang: At about half past four.

T: What do you often do in your spare time?

Kangkang: I often play basketball.

（老师板书新单词、短语。）

interviewer， guest， school life， eat out， have a short sleep, finish, in your spare time,

basketball

6.（让学生扮演采访者，向Kangkang提问题。）

T: Now， the other students. Do you have any other questions? You can ask Kangkang.

S1: What time do you usually get to school?

Kangkang: I usually get to school at about seven o’clock.

S2: What time do the classes begin in the morning?

Kangkang: At about twenty to eight.

S3: How many lessons do you have every day?

Kangkang: I have 7 lessons every day.

S4: ...

7.（采访结束。）

T: OK. The interview is over. Thank you, Kangkang. Now， do you want to know about the

school life of American students? Listen to the tape carefully.

Step 2 Presentation第二步 呈现（时间：5分钟）

（设置并板书听力任务。）

T: Listen to the tape and answer the following questions.

How do American students usually get to school?

Where do they eat lunch?

Do they have a short break after lunch?

What time do the classes finish in the afternoon?

What do they often do in their spare time?

（听录音，回答问题。）

walk or take a yellow school bus...eat out...have a short break...finish

classes...in their spare time

（将关键词写在黑板上，呈现1a，向学生讲解中、美学生学校生活的异同。）

Step 3 Consolidation第三步 巩固（时间：5分钟）

1.（老师放录音1a，示范让学生跟读，用铅笔标重读与语调。）

T: Follow the tape and draw “up or down” with your pencil like this.

2.（老师让学生擦去所标重读与语调，先自读，然后跟录音一起读。）

T: Rub them clean and now read and check your pronunciation sentence by sentence.Go!

3.（人机对话，即学生和录音机对话。）

T: You are Michael. Listen to interviewer and make a dialog with her.

4.（看第二步呈现黑板上的关键词，学生两人一组表演1a。）

T: Work in pairs. Close your book， look at the blackboard and act the dialog out.

Step 4 Practice第四步 练习（时间：15分钟）

1.（学生做1b Pair work。）

T: Practice the dialogs in 1b in pairs.

2.（学生两人之间互相采访。）

T: Work in pairs. Suppose one of you is an interviewer. Do an interview between you and your partner.

3.（老师出示一张Wang Junfeng打游戏机的图片。）

T: I usually play soccer after school. What does you usually do after school， S1?

S1: I usually read books.

T: Look at this picture. What does Wang Junfeng usually do after school?

S1: He usually plays computer games.

T: Do you often play computer games?

S1: No， I don’t.

T: How often do you go to the Net Bar?

S1: Seldom.

T: That’s very good.

T: Do you often play computer games， S2?

S2: Yes， I do.

T: How often do you go to the Net Bar?

S2: Very often.

T: That’s too bad! Work must come first!

（板书）

play soccer踢足球play computer games打电脑游戏

Work must come first!工作第一！

4.（老师出示一张Yu Jing在看图书的图片。）

T: What do you usually do after school， S3?

S3:I usually play basketball.

T: Now， look at this picture. What does Yu Jing usually do after school?

S3:He usually reads story books.

T: Do you often read books in the library?

S3:Yes， I do./No， I don’t.

T: How often do you go to the library?

（老师引出并教学once/twice/three times a week，然后让学生回答。）

S3:Once a week.

T: That’s good. We must study hard.

（老师板书关键词。）

read story books看故事书once/twice/three times a week一周一次/两次/三次

（用同样方法教学clean， dance， roller skating板书）

clean the house打扫房子go dancing去跳舞go roller skating去滑旱冰

5.（让学生练习2 Pair work。）

T: Look at the pictures. Work in pairs. One asks and the other answers. Then change the roles.

6.（学生做3 Listen, ask and answer，进行链式对话。）

T: Now，let’s use the phrases in the box of 3 to do a chain work like this.

S1:Do you often...?

S2:Yes， I do./No， I don’t.

S1:How often do you...?

S2:Once/Twice/Three times a week./Very often./Every day./Seldom... Do you often...?

S3:...

Step 5 Project第五步 综合探究活动（时间：10分钟）

1.（学生做调查报告，并向全班汇报。）

T: Make a survey of your classmates and fill in the chart. Then report it to your class.

A: How often do you watch TV?

B: Once a week…

watch TV

in the evening Walk to school play computer games help your parents play basketball

Li Ming Once a week

Report: Li Ming watches TV in the evening once a week...

2.（让学生就中外学生学校生活的异同做比较。）

（把全班学生分成四组，每小组在一起讨论关于中美学生不同学习生活的资料，由一人

进行归纳总结。然后每组推荐出一个小记者，向全班同学汇报，所有同学要求记录下来。

需用纸制话筒，椅子等。）

T: The whole class talk about something about the different school lives between American

students and Chinese students. Then write them down.

Example:

In America， students walk or take a yellow school bus. In China， students...

3. Homework:

(1)Write a passage about what you usually do or seldom do in a week.

Example:

I usually go to school on foot. I seldom...

(2)回家通过多种渠道收集有关中西方国家的文化差异的信息。

(3)归纳所有的频度副词。

Section D

The main activities are 1，2 and 5. 本课重点活动是1，2和5。

Ⅰ. Teaching aids and demands 教学目标

1. Learn the phonetics:

｜溃，｜茫，｜t溃，｜d茫

2. Talk about daily grammars:

（1）Talk about adverbs of frequency:

seldom， never， sometimes， often， usually， always

（2）Talk about the simple present tense:

①How do you usually go to school?

I usually go to school on foot.

②How does Michael often go to school?

He often walks to school.

③How often do you go to the library?

Three times a week.

3. Talk about daily routines.

Ⅱ. Teaching aids 教具

音标卡片/录音机/人体钟/课件

Ⅲ. Five-finger Teaching Plan五指教学方案

Step 1 Review第一步 复习（时间：10分钟）

1.（用“Happy New Year!”来导入复习并做4b。活跃课堂气氛，引起学生兴趣。）

T: Let’s sing the song “Happy New Year!” together.

2.（呈现“The early bird catches the worm.”，并译成汉语，勉励学生勤奋学习。板书如下：）

The early bird catches the worm.

笨鸟先飞/早起的鸟儿有虫吃。

3.（检查上节课到社会上做调查表的作业，找几位同学读出自己调查的结果，公布于全班

同学。培养学生的成就感，社会责任感。）

T: Take out your surveys. I’ll ask some students to report your answers to the class.

4.（听录音，做3。第一遍，学生只听，第二遍，边听边写下答案，第三遍，边听边连线。）

T: First， just listen.

Second， listen and write.

Third， listen and match.

5.（听完录音，核对答案。叫学生把句子写在黑板上，也许在学生重抄句子的过程中能发

现自己的错误。培养自我发现、自我总结能力。）

T: Please come to the front to write your answers on the blackboard. If your answers are wrong,

correct them. Now， check your answers.

Step 2 Presentation第二步 呈现（时间：5分钟）

1.（全班学生人手各执一卡片，卡片上只有教学目标中列出的4个音标，做1。老师读其中

的一个音标，所有执那个音标卡片的学生全站起来，依次类推，做完4个音标的训练。

全班动员，人人参与。）

T: Everyone has a card. If I read ｜｜， raise your card ｜｜. If I read ｜t｜，

please raise your card ｜t｜. Do you understand?

2.（一学生读卡片上的音标，其所在小组其它成员均举起他/她读的音标卡片。）

T: Practice in groups. One reads the phonetics, others raise your cards.

3.（接龙游戏。第一个学生读一个音标，全班其余的有这个音标卡片的同学都边举卡片边

读。）

T: Let’s have a new game. Example: S1 reads ｜｜， if you have the card ｜｜， please

raise your card and read it out.

4.（预习2，划出交通工具的名词和一般现在时的句子。）

Step 3 Consolidation第三步 巩固（时间：10分钟）

1.（听录音1，模仿原文语音语调。）

T: Listen to 1， read after the tape. Pay attention to your pronunciation.

2.（检查学生们是否已划出2中全文的一般现在时及交通工具。）

T: Look at 2. Where are the simple present tense?

Who wants to say: please!

Well done. Clap your hands for him/her!

Who wants to talk about the means of transport?

Wonderful! Today I’m very glad. Why? Do you know?

3.（两人一组，全班合作，接龙游戏，做2。找学生读一句英语，他的下一位同学要翻译此句，依次类推。）

T: Would you love to play a game again?

Ss: ...

T: These are rules.

Example:

S1: Read the first sentence in English.

S2: Say the same sentence in Chinese.

S3: Read the second sentence in English.

S4: Say the same sentence in Chinese.

S5: Read the third sentence in English.

S6: Say the same sentence in Chinese.

Work in pairs and do 2. Can you catch me now?

OK， begin!

4.（分组活动，全班分三大组，一组读译一段课文。）

T: Now，work in groups. We have three groups. One group read the first part in both English

and Chinese， the other group read the second part in both English and Chinese，the last

group read the third part in both English and Chinese. Go!

5.（男女生互相监督。男生用英语读全文，女生翻译出全文，其余的男、女生监督他俩是

否有错误。若有错误老师及时给予纠正。）

Step 4 Practice第四步 练习（时间：10分钟）

1.（不看课文填表。培养锻炼学生的记忆能力。）

T: Don’t look at your books and fill in the chart on page 8.

2.（人体钟游戏。某学生用肢体当时钟，其余同学复述2中的内容。）

T: Do you want to play a new game? A body clock. One student is a clock like this，all the rest retell the story on page 7. Example:

（让一同学用手臂表示时针和分针。游戏方法：主持人发令：Ready. Go!作“钟”的同

学摆出姿势，摆出page 7短文中出现的时间，其他同学根据姿势猜时刻后，再复述出这个时间点里Jane所做的事情及活动。）

3.（制作表格，介绍自己一天的活动。）

T: Make a new chart about your daily activities.

4.（利用课件，全班学生一起做1。）

5.（利用课件，简单归纳一般现在时，设计如下：）

（1）A: What time is it?

B: It’s seven o’clock.

（2）We want to know about the school life of American students.

（3）A: Do they have a short break after lunch?

B: No， they don’t.

（4）A: How do you usually go to school?

B: I usually go to school on foot.

（5）A: How does Michael often go to school?

B: He often walks to school.

（6）A: How often do you go to the library?

B: Three times a week.

Step 5 Project 第五步 综合探究活动（时间：10分钟）

1.（分组活动。做1。一组负责一个音标，总结所有学过单词中发这个音的单词。）

T: Do 1 on Page 7 in groups. First we’re divided into 4 groups. You’ll collect the words which pronounces the same phonetic in your brain.

2.（四人活动，使用音标图片一起学习这4个音标的正确发音。）

T: Let’s practice the four phonetics in groups.

Every group has four members.

3.（找几位学生把总结出来的所有单词向大家汇报。）

T: Have you finished your collection? I’ll ask some students to report your answers to the class.

4.（独立学习，做1和 2。）

T: Work alone 1 and 2.

5.（制表格做5，复习这一个话题学过的句型及重难点。）

T: Make a survey， just do 5 on page 8.

Use the sentences and pay attention to the key words.

6.（分组讨论，做2，为下步布置作业作准备。）

T: Talk about 2 on page 7 in groups.

7. Homework:

Write a passage about your daily activities.

Topic 2

Section A

The main activities are 1，2a and 3.本课重点活动是1，2a和3。

Ⅰ. Teaching aims and demands教学目标

1. Learn the names of school buildings:

playground， lab， room， gym， classroom， road， building， pool

2. Learn the names of other things: thing, card

3. Learn the present continuous tense:

What are you doing?

I am reading in the library.

What is he doing?

He is watching TV in the bedroom.

4. Learn likes and dislikes:

Do you like our school?

Yes，I do./No， I don’t.

I like the computer room best.

I don’t like the library.

Ⅱ. Teaching aids教具

录音机

Ⅲ. Five-finger Teaching Plan五指教学方案

Step 1 Review 第一步 复习（时间：10分钟）

1.（做一个调查，调查学生是否喜欢校园生活，在课余经常做什么活动，为校园场所名称

的学习埋下伏笔，也为现在进行时的学习提供动词词组。）

S1: =Yuan Hong

T: Today I want to make a survey. Yuan Hong， please answer my questions. Do you like

our school life?

S1: Yes， I like our school life.

T: What do you usually do in your spare time?

S1: I usually play basketball.

T: Thank you. ××，what do you usually do in your spare time?

S2: I often read books.

T: What about you， ××?

S3: I often go swimming.

...

2.（询问学生通常在哪里做上述活动，呈现校园场所名称。）

T: I know you can have happy school life. Yuan Hong usually plays basketball.××（S2）

often reads books.××（S3）often goes swimming...Please answer my questions now.

Where do we play basketball?

S1: Playground.

T: Where do we read story books?

S2: Library.

T: Where do we swim?

S3: Swimming pool.

...

（让学生根据预习，说出校园内场所的名称。）

T: Can you name the school buildings?

S1: Library，dining hall...

S2: Gym，lab...

...

3.（让学生跟读1的录音，并把词与图正确搭配。）

T: Please listen to the tape and repeat. Then write the letters in the right place on the picture.

4.（引导学生观察1的图画，呈现现在进行时态。）

T: Look at the picture. We can see a student in the library. What’s he doing? He’s reading a

book.

（板书句型。）

What’s he doing?

He’s reading a book.

（让学生听图中的对话，并板书。）

T: Listen to the tape and repeat.

What’re you doing?

I’m reading Harry Potter.

（让学生试着判断上面两个句型是用来表述什么时间下的动作。）

T：（用汉语）黑板上两个句型中的动作是发生在什么时间的？

Ss：现在正在进行的动作。

T: That’s right. When we express something is happening， we use the present continuous tense.

(让学生跟读句子，总结现在进行时的结构特点。)

T: Please read after me. And find the rules of the present continuous tense. He’s reading a book.

Ss: He’s reading a book.

T: I’m reading Harry Potter.

Ss: I’m reading Harry Potter.

T: Do you find the rules?

Ss: Yes. be + doing.

be+doing

be动词+动词ing形式

Step 2 Presentation第二步 呈现（时间：5分钟）

（让学生听、读2a对话，完成2b表格。）

T：Please listen to the tape， then read it again. Fill in the chart in 2b.

Name Kangkang Maria Wang Wei

Favorite place

Things he/she is doing

Step 3 Consolidation第三步 巩固（时间：5分钟）

1.（让学生跟读对话。）

T：Listen to the tape and repeat.

2.（让学生分角色朗读。）

T：Please work in pairs， read the dialog.

3.（让学生根据对话内容，回答问题。）

T: Please answer my questions. Which place does Michael like best?

S1: Computer room.

T: Which place does Jane like best?

S2: She likes the swimming pool best.

T: Which place does Kangkang like best?

S3: ...

...

4.（让学生合上书本，根据对话内容说出Michael等5位同学分别喜欢的地点。）

T: They like different places. Please tell me which place they like best.

S1: Michael likes computer room best. Jane likes...

S2: ..

Step 4 Practice 第四步 练习（时间：12分钟）

1.（问学生Kangkang等人正在做什么。）

T: Look at the pictures in 2a. Answer my questions.

What’s Kangkang doing?

S1: Kang is playing soccer.

T: What’s Maria doing?

S2: She is reading a story book.

T: What’s Wang Wei doing?

S3: He is sleeping.

2.（让学生跟读3中的对话。）

T: Please listen to the tape and repeat.

（根据对话内容提问，让学生回答，呈现现在进行时的一般疑问句形式。）

T: Is Jane doing her homework?

Ss: No， she isn’t.

T: Is Jane watching TV?

Ss: Yes， she is.

T: Is Michael playing basketball?

Ss: No， he isn’t.

T: What’s he doing?

Ss: He’s making cards.

3.（让学生根据4的图画进行两人对话。）

T: Please look at the pictures in 4. Ask and answer in pairs.

S1: Where is she?

S2: She is in the gym.

S1: Is she singing?

S2: No， she isn’t.

S1: What’s she doing?

S2: She’s dancing.

Step 5 Project 第五步 综合探究活动（时间：13分钟）

1.（让学生调查班级的同学喜欢校园的哪里及原因。）

T: Please make a survey. And fill in the chart.

Name Favorite place Why

Wei Wei playground likes playing soccer

（让学生根据调查内容做报告。）

T: Please report what you surveyed.

S1: Wei Wei likes playground. He likes playing soccer.

...

2.（让学生根据chant的内容做动作。）

T: I’ll chant. Please perform the action when I chant.

What’re you doing now?

I am swimming now.

（学生做游泳动作。）

What’re you doing now?

I am running now.

（学生做跑步动作。）

...

3.（请一个学生到台上做动作，其它同学用现在进行时态进行问答。）

T: Li Juan， come here.（出示一个dance的动词卡片给她看。）Please perform the action.

（学生表演跳舞动作。）

T: What is she doing?

S: She’s dancing.

...

4.（作业，要求学生调查班级同学课余最喜欢做什么，最喜欢校园的什么场所。）

T: Please make a survey. What does your friend often do in spare time? Which place does

he/she like best and why? And write a short passage.

SectionB

The main activities are 1a， 2 and 3a.本课重点活动是1a， 2和3a。

Ⅰ. Teaching aids and demands教学目标

1. learn other useful words and expressions:

most, better, minute， shelf， great, dear， borrow, of course, keep， return， post, newspaper, purse， money， anything， else, nothing, meal, umbrella

2. Talk about the present continuous tense:

What are you doing?

I’m looking for my purse.

Are you playing basketball?

No， I’m not.

3. Talk about how to buy and borrow things.

4. Talk about Lost and Found.

Ⅱ.Teaching aids教具

录音机/图片/报纸/书/课件

Ⅲ. Five-finger Teaching Plan五指教学方案

Step 1 Review第一步 复习（时间：10分钟）

1.（检查上次作业。）

T: Now， let’s check homework. S1， S2， S3 and S4， please report your answers to the class. S1， you， first. Go!

2.（两人对话。复习现在进行时。）

T: Work in pairs. Look at Page 10， 4， and make dialogs like these sentences. Attention!

Present continuous. I’ll give you two minutes to prepare. Then I’ll ask two students to act

out your dialogs.

3.（三人搭档活动。一位学生手拿任意一张图片或在黑板上画简笔画，另两位学生一问一

答，继续复习现在进行时的句子或一般现在时的句子。）

T: Work in groups. This time I’ll ask three students to act the picture out. How to do it?

（老师随即叫出三位学生，吩咐他们各自要做的任务。）

4.（老师与学生两人一起表演在书店买书的过程。导入1a。老师参与表演，学生会更加积

极地参与课堂教学活动。）

T: Let’s play a game.

（老师手拿一本仁爱版的英语教辅书。）

T: Boys and girls. I want to buy a book like this. Who is the boss of a bookstore? Who loves to act with me?

Step 2 Presentation第二步 呈现（时间：5分钟）

1.（利用课件或图片呈现1a。若用图片，老师课前应该已要求学生将有关书店买书活动的

新单词制成卡片，卡片上尽量显示图画和单词两部分。老师现在手拿一张书店的图片，

图片的下面写着“bookstore”。）

T: Look at the picture， where is it?

Ss: “书店”。

T: What is this in English? Read after me， please.

（老师拿着一张一学生正在买书的图片）

T: What is he doing now? S1， do you know?

S1: I think he is buying books.

2. (老师假设一种情景：假如你买不到想要的图书，那该怎么办吗？对，应该很有礼貌地向别人借一下。)

T: Let’s learn 1b. Learn how to borrow books from others.

T: Excuse me, may I borrow this book?

S1: Sure! Here you are!

T: How long can I keep it?

S2: Two weeks.

(同时把重、难点板书在黑板上。)

May I borrow...?

Sure!/Certainly!/Of course.

You must .../Thank you anyway.

You’re welcome.

Step 3 Consolidation第三步 巩固（时间：5分钟）

1.（听录音，做1a。）

T: Look at 1a. Just listen， please.

2.（表演竞赛。教室前面一书架上摆满仁爱版和其他版本图书，然后找三组学生表演1a，

最后学生们自己评出哪组表演的最优秀。老师对胜出者给予仁爱版图书以奖励。）

T: Work in groups. Three groups will come to the front of the classroom to act. Do you love

Ren’ai books? If you win， I will give two Ren’ai books to the winners. Which group will

win? Ready， please. (Two minutes later.) Let’s begin to act the dialogs out.

3.（双人对话。找两位学生表演1b，一学生买不到书，然后找好朋友借。）

T: Don’t look at your books. Now， I will ask two students to act 1b out. S1 and S2， you，

please.

Step 4 Practice第四步 练习（时间：15分钟）

1.（老师又拿出一学生像在路上寻找东西的图片。）

T: Well done. S2， look at the picture.Guess， what is he doing?

S2: I think he is looking for something.

T: You are right. He lost something.

（板书上句中划线单词lost，导入3a。板书如下：）

Lost: Found:

I lost a book. A book.

（一人正在寻找东西的图片。） Please call:

Please call: 8856309 8821437

寻物启示 失物招领

（老师解释板书的内容，叫学生预习3a一分钟。）

2.（让学生人手三张卡片，分别写上数字号码1、2、3，以备胜出者用。）

T: Are you ready? The first group， please.

（第一组表演结束后。）

T: Well done! Let’s clap for them. The second group， are you ready? Please.

（三组都表演结束后。）

T: Now， let’s choose the best group. which group is the best? Raise the number card. Go!

3.（听录音，做2和3a。）

T: Be quiet， please. Let’s listen to the tape. Don’t look at your books. Just listen， please.

（放完录音后。）

T: Now， look at your books， 2 and 3a on Page 12. Read after the tape.

（老师开始重放2的录音。）

4.（双人对话，做1b。）

T: Work in pairs. Do 1b on the Page 11. Pay attention to the key words and phrases.

（老师强调重、难点。）

May I borrow...?

Sure!/Certainly!/Of course.

You must do...

Thank you./Thank you anyway.

You’re welcome.

5.（分组表演。做2，全班分四组表演，每一组中每次抽出三人分别扮演Michael， Maria

和Girl。）

T: Work in groups and do 2. Now we have four groups. Every group sends three members to

be as Michael， Maria and Girl.

6.（表演竞赛。用表演1a的竞赛规则或方式来做2。）

T: Would you love to be winners? Do you want to get the red flag? Let’s do 2. How to do it?...

Step 5 Project第五步 综合探究活动（时间：10分钟）

1.（听录音，复述或复习1a， 2和3a的内容。）

（1）（先找一学生回忆1a的内容，然后听录音1a，再让其复述1a的内容。）

T: Boys and girls. Have you remebered the story of 1a? S1, you want to try? Retell the story,

please. Let’s clap for him/her!

（2）（鼓励更多的学生来参与复述2课文内容。）

T: S2， do you want to try? Try to retell the story of 2. Who else? Raise your hand. Wow， so many!

（3）（分组表演竞赛，做3a。表演即复习3a的内容。）

2. Homework:

（1）写一篇有关买书过程的小短文，大约10句话。

（2）写一则失物招领启示，不少于两个句子。

（3）预习13页的1a。

（4）如有兴趣，画一张本校的建筑物分布图。

Section C

The main activities are 1a and 2a.本课重点活动是1a和2a。

Ⅰ. Teaching aims and demands教学目标

1. Learn other useful words and expressions:

plan, next to,near， upstairs， news， attention， between, movie, show, hall, program, gone,

wind, activity,stamp， world

2. Talk about news and poster.

Ⅱ.Teaching aids教具

录音机／图片／挂图／单词卡片

Ⅲ. Five-finger Teaching Plan五指教学方案

Step 1 Review第一步 复习（时间：15分钟）

1.（对话表演，全班分为四组，每组各表演一个对话，其他学生认真听，找错误。对话时

间以一分钟为限，老师数句子，称为一分钟对话。第一组学生借东西，可以在教室内走

动。第二组东西丢了，去失物招领处找回来。第三组去书店买书。第四组请一个学生表

演动作，另两个学生用现在进行时对话。通过这个活动来热身，吸引学生的注意力，复

习现在进行时并复习前面的对话。）

T: Group 1， please!

S1: ...

S2: ...

T: Very good! 20 sentences! Can you find any mistakes in the dialog?...Yeah， you’re right.

Let’s go on， Group 2， please!

...

2.（贴一张本校的图片在黑板上，先把左边的学校场所名称用纸张遮起来。）

CLASSROOM BUILDING（教学楼。）

（1、2、3、4、5、6、7、8八间教室，9、10老师办公室，11、12、13、14、15、16学生宿舍。）

T: Look at the picture， answer my questions:

（指着电脑室。）

T: What are they doing?

Ss： They are playing on the computer.

T: What’s the name of the room? Can you guess?

Ss: Yes, computer room.

T： Where’s the computer room?

S1: It’s in the classroom building.

S2：It’s next to the lab.

T： Good. We can also say，“It’s upstairs.”它在楼上。

（板书划线部分，英汉对照，导入新词upstairs。）

T：Which room is upstairs next to the computer room?

S3： I think it’s a lab. Is it right?

T: Right.

（指着图书馆。）

T: What are they doing?

S4: They are reading books.

T: hat’s the name of the room?

S5: Library. Is it a library?

T: You are right. Where is the library?

S6: It’s next to the room. I think it’s next to the gym. It’s a gym near(在……附近)the library.Because many students are dancing in the room. So I guess it’s a gym.

T: Well done! What’s the meaning of “near”? You know， yes， 在……附近。Who can

tell me, where is the dormitory building?

S7： It’s near the classroom building.它在教学楼附近。

（板书划线部分。通过以上活动，不仅导入新词near， upstairs，而且复习了学校场所

名称和现在进行时。）

Step 2 Presentation 第二步 呈现（时间：5分钟）

1.（设置并板书听力任务。）

T: Listen to the tape and answer the questions:

（1）Where is my classroom?

（2）What do you do after school?

（3）What are near my classroom?

（4）Where is the computer room?

（听录音，回答问题。）

next to-near-upstairs-play soccer

（将关键词写在黑板上，呈现出1。）

2.（在平面图上填写学校场所。）

T: Read the passage and complete the places of the school.

Step 3 Consolidation 第三步 巩固（时间：5分钟）

1.（老师放录音1a。学生跟读。）

T: Follow the tape and repeat loudly.

2.（看图和黑板上的关键词复述短文。）

3.（完成1b和1c）

Step 4 Practice 第四步 练习（时间：15分钟）

1.（听2a的录音，回答问题。板书问题。）

（1）When does the game begin?

（2）Where is the game?

（3）When does the movie Gone with the Wind begin?

（4）When does the movie The sound of Music begin?

（5）Where can we watch the movies?

2.（学生跟读2a。）

3.（学生听做2b。）

4.（做3。）

T: Read Poster 1 and then fill in the blanks of Poster 2.

5.（用单词卡片再现本课新词，并造句。）

Examples：

T: What’s this in English， please?

Ss： Attention， please.

（出示“新闻”卡片。）

T: What’s this in English， please?

Ss: News. It’s a piece of news.它是一则新闻。

（出示“在……之间”卡片。）

Ss: Between， he sits between you and me.

（出示“邮票”卡片。）

T: How to say“邮票，邮展”in English?

S1: Stamp， stamp collection show.

（出示“世界”卡片。）

T: What’s this in English? How to say “在世界上”in English?

S2: World. In the world.

（出示“礼堂”卡片。）

S3: Hall. Come and see the stamp collection show in the school hall.

T: Wonderful， you are good boys and girls.

Step 5 Project 第五步 综合探究活动（时间：5分钟）

1.（描述理想的学校，把它画下来，每组请一个学生到黑板上画。）

2. (假设星期六晚上学校要在礼堂举行一个歌舞晚会，请一起制作一个海报。)

3. Homework：

（1）(复习本单元单词，以便下节课单词竞赛。)

（2）(准备一分钟对话。)

Section D

The main activities are 1，3a and 5.本课重点活动是1，3a和5。

Ⅰ. Teaching aims and demands教学目标

1. Learn the phonetics：

||, ||, ||, ||

2. Learn other useful words and expressions：

traffic, child, exercise, Japanese, the Great Wall, wonderful

3. Review the present continuous tense:

I’m looking for a book.

He isn’t cleaning the dormitory.

Are you doing your homework?

Yes， I am.／No， I’m not.

Is he／she...?

Yes， he／she is.／No， he／she isn’t.

What is he／she doing?

He／She is...

4. Talk about news.

Ⅱ. Teaching aids教具

录音机／单词卡片

Ⅲ. Five-finger Teaching Plan 五指教学方案

Step 1 Review 第一步 复习（时间：15分钟）

1.（单词竞赛，老师抽查三排学生，被抽到的排，从左到右往下轮，每个学生读并拼出一

个单词，造一个句子。用上现在进行时态，单词一分，句子两分。全班同学一起找错误，

找到一个错误加两分。）

Example：

T： Please read the names of the school building， and make a sentence. One by one.

S1：Library. In the library. I’m reading in the library.

S2：Playground. On the playground. I’m running on the playground.

S3：Pool. The swimming pool. He’s swimming in the swimming pool.

（复习前面三课的单词，板书如下：）

library， playground， lab， room， gym， building， pool， motorcycle， road，

shelf， physics， keep， return， borrow

（通过竞赛，吸引学生注意力，活跃课堂气氛，调动学习积极性。）

2.（一分钟对话，复习现在进行时的肯定句，否定句，一般疑问句，特殊疑问句及其回答。）

(比赛规则：老师抽一排，全班4组8对学生，编一个对话进行比赛，时间为一分钟。请

一个同学计时，老师数句子。一句一分，全班同学找错误，找到一个错误加两分，鼓励

学生，并能提高听力能力。)

3.（老师拿出一张照片，上面是一个日本女孩在健身房跳健美操。）

T： She is my pen pal， do you like her?

Ss： Yes, she is a beautiful girl， I like her a lot.

T： Is she running?

Ss： No， she isn’t.

T： What’s she doing?

Ss： She is dancing.

T： Yeah, right. She is taking exercise in the gym. 她在健身房做锻炼。Do you like taking

exercise?

Ss： Yes, we do.

T： Where is she from? Do you know?

Ss： She is from Japanese.

T： No， you are wrong. She is from Japan. She is Japanese. She is a Japanese girl.她是日本人，她是一个日本女孩。

（板书划线部分，英汉对照。导入exercise， Japanese。）

S1： I know， Kamiko is from Japan， she is Japanese.

S2： Xiaodingdang is from Japan， Kangfu is a Japanese boy.

S3： Yingtaoxiaowangzi is a Japanese girl， too.

T：You are all clever， you love cartoons. Who likes taking exercise in the cartoons? Can you

tell me?

S4： Daxiong likes taking exercise， so he is very strong.

S5： Kangfu doesn’t like taking exercise， so he is short and weak.

T：Good， you are wonderful.

Step 2 Presentation 第二步 呈现（时间：10分钟）

1.（呈现含/ts/、/dz/、/tr/、/dr/的单词卡片，让学生熟悉这些发音，为下面的操练做准

备。）

T: What’s this?

S: It’s “boats”.

T: What’s that?

S: It’s “shirts”.

（板书boats， shirts，要求学生找规律。）

T： Look at these two words. What can you find out?

S1： ...

S2： ...

T： Good! Shirts “ts” makes /ts/，boats “ts” ， too.

You are clever! Read after me...

（再举个/dz/的例子，步骤同上；然后呈现/tr/音标，运用头脑风暴法要求学生尽可能多

地说出发这个音的单词，再进行归纳，讲授/dr/的方法同｜tr｜。并给出答案，谁能说出

1个单词就加1分。）

Example：

playgrounds/dz/, roads/dz/ ， Australia /tr/，interest /tr/， restaurant /tr/， draw /dr/， drink

/dr/， hundred /dr/

T: Look at /tr/. What words have the sound /tr/ in them?

S: ...

T: Clever! I think “interest， Australia” have the sound /tr/.

Let’s go on another phonetics /dr/. Who knows...?

2.（听录音，跟读1。）

T: Read after the tape， please.

3.（全班大声齐读，巩固所学单标。）

4.（看3a图，听录音，判断正误。）

T: Look and listen carefully， fill in the blanks.

（板书。）

（1）He is ________ ________ in the gym in Picture 1.

（2）In picture 2， he is swimming in the ________ ________ .

（3）In picture 3， he is talking to ________ ________ ________ on the Great Wall.

Step 3 Consolidation 第三步 巩固（时间：5分钟）

1.（再放一遍录音，并给学生两分钟时间准备，看图问答。每组请一对同学，一句加两分。）

T: Ask and answer in pairs according to the pictures as possible as you can.

Example：

A: Where is Wen Wei in Picture 1／...?

B: He is...

A: What is he doing?

B: He is...

Step 4 Practice 第四步 练习（时间：10分钟）

1.（听录音，跟读4a， 4b。让学生再复习一遍本话题的重难点。）

2.（学生做2。）

T: Listen carefully and match.

3.（连线后，再让学生把这些句子变成否定句、一般疑问句、特殊疑问句并回答。）

Example：

S1: Which place does Jane like best?

S2: I think she likes her bedroom best.

S3: Is Maria singing a song in the classroom?

S4: Yes， she is.

S5: Kangkang is playing soccer in the gym. Is it right or wrong?

S6: It’s wrong. He is playing soccer on the playground.

S7: What are their teachers doing?

S8: They are working in the office.

...

（通过双人活动，学生充分地掌握了本话题的4a和4b。）

Step 5 Project 第五步 综合探究活动（时间：5分钟）

1.（布置学生每人写一篇海报。）

2.（展示学生的海报并在班上读出来。）

Example:

Found: A yellow purse is in the Lost and Found Room. Please come to get it at 3∶00 p.m.

today.

(假设海报贴出来后，有几个同学前来认领钱包。写海报的同学当即采访他们。)

Questions：

（1）What color is the purse?

（2）What’s in the purse?

（3）Where’s the purse?

（4）What time can I get the purse?

Topic 3

Section A

The main activities are 1 and 2a.本课重点活动是1和2a。

Ⅰ. Teaching aims and demands教学目标

1.（1）Learn days of the week：

Monday， Tuesday， Wednesday， Thursday， Friday

（2）Learn subjects：

history， math， art， geography， P.E.

2. Review present continuous Wh-questions:

-What class are they having?

-They’re having a music class.

3. Talk about subjects and timetable:

-What time does the class begin?

-At ten o’clock.

-What time does it finish?

-At twenty to eleven.

Ⅱ. Teaching aids教具

录音机／图片／小黑板

Ⅲ. Five-finger Teaching Plan五指教学方案

Step 1 Review 第一步 复习（时间：15分钟）

1.（师生共同说唱，复习现在进行时。）

T: Let’s chant “What are you doing?”

What are you doing now?

I’m singing now.

What are you doing now?

I’m dancing now.

What are you doing now?

I’m walking now.

What are you doing now?

I’m playing now.

（老师一边唱，一边做动作，全班同学跟着唱，一起做动作，活跃课堂，激发学生兴趣。）

2.（通过复习，导入科目。）

T: What are you doing now?

Ss: We are singing a song.

T： What are we doing now? We can also say “We are having a class now.” What class are

we having? We are having an English class.

(我们正在上什么课？我们正在上英语课。)

（板书划线部分，英汉对照，导出新的词组have an English class。）

T: Do you have an English class every day?

Ss: Yes， we do.

T: What time does the class begin?

Ss: At ten to eight.

T: What time does the class finish?

Ss: At twenty-five to nine.

（板书划线部分，引出生词begin， finish。）

（挂出小黑板，开始呈现科目，练习问科目，上、下课时间单词。）

Subject Time

（begin-finish） What day

English 7∶50-8∶35 every day

Math 8∶45-9∶30 every day

Geography 9∶50-10∶35 Monday

History 10∶45-11∶30 Tuesday

Biology 14∶00-14∶45 Wednesday

Art 14∶55-15∶40 Thursday

P.E. 15∶50-16∶35 Friday

T: Look at the blackboard， answer my questions. Do you have a math class every day?

Ss: Yes， we do.

T: What time does the class begin?

Ss: At...

T: What time does the class finish?

Ss: At...

T: Now I give you two minutes to practice these sentences. You work in pairs.

（给学生两分钟时间练习，同桌对话。一个同学问，一个同学答，然后交换角色。）

3.（引出表示星期的单词。）

T: Do you have a Chinese class today?

Ss: Yes， we do.

T: What day is it today?

Ss: It is Monday.

（板书呈现生词Monday，学习询问今天星期几及其回答。）

T: What class do we have on Tuesday? 在星期二，我们上什么课？

Ss: History.历史课。

（帮助学生回答，并再给学生两分钟时间，练习星期的表达法。）

Step 2 Presentation 第二步 呈现（时间：5分钟）

（设置并板书听力任务。让学生带着任务听录音，可以降低难度。）

What day is it today?

What class are they having?

What time does the class begin?

What time does it finish?

（听录音，回答问题。）

Wednesday-have a music class-begin-finish

（将关键词写在黑板上，呈现出1，为下一步学生不看课本自由表演打下基础。）

Step 3 Consolidation 第三步 巩固（时间：5分钟）

1.（老师放录音1，示范让学生跟读，用铅笔标重读与语调。）

T: Follow the tape and draw “up or down” with your pencil like this.

2.（老师让学生擦去所标重读与语调，先自读，然后跟录音一起读，逐句核对语音语调。

这样做可以集中学生注意力，提高效率。）

T: Rub them clean and now read and check your pronunciation sentence by sentence. Go!

3.（人机对话，提高学生兴趣。）

T: You are Jane. Listen to Helen and make a dialog with her.

4.（学生两人一组表演1。）

T: Work in pairs. Look at the blackboard and act the dialog out.

Step 4 Practice第四步 练习（时间：10分钟）

1.（老师把一张漂亮的图片贴在黑板上，上面是一张英语课程表，下面是六个问题。）

T: Look at the timetable and answer the questions.

（1）How many lessons do you have every day?

（2）How many English lessons do you have every week?

（3）What time do morning classes begin?

（4）What time is school over?

（5）What is your favorite subject?

（6）How often do you do outdoor activities?

2.（使用动作复习有关科目和星期的单词。）

T: Now， look at me and guess， what am I doing? Which class am I in?

（老师做出唱歌跳舞的动作。）

Ss: You are singing and dancing in music class.

T: What day do you have a music class?

Ss: On Wednesday.

（让一个同学做动作，另外两个同学一问一答。）

Example：

S1: 做画画动作。

S2: What is he doing? And which class is he in?

S3: He is drawing pictures in art class.

（小组活动进行替换操练，完成2b。）

3.（呈现P183的两幅图片，双人活动，进行对话练习。）

T: Let’s read 3 and work in pairs like this：

Examples：

A: What day is it today?

B: It’s...

A: What class are they having?

B: They’re...

A: What time does the class begin?

B: At...

A: What time does the class finish?

B: At...

4.（让学生做4。）

T: Listen and fill in the chart.

Step 5 Project 第五步 综合探究活动（时间：10分钟）

1.（做一个调查，采访班上的同学，了解他们一周中每一天喜欢的科目及原因。）

T: Please design your favorite timetable for a week and fill in the chart.

Time Favorite subject Like／Dislike Reasons What day

8∶00-9∶00 Art Like very much Like drawing pictures Monday

Tuesday

Wednesday

Thursday

Friday

2.（学生完成调查表格后，把调查结果汇报给全班同学。）

T: You can report it to your class like this：

On Monday， my favorite subject is art. It begins at eight and finishes at nine. I like it very

much. Because I like drawing pictures.

3. Homework：

(做英语课程表。)

Section B

The main activities are 1a and 2.本课重点活动是1a和2。

Ⅰ. Teaching aims and demands教学目标

1. Learn some useful words and expressions：

question， Australia， easy， interesting， difficult， boring

2. Talk about likes and dislikes：

Why do／don’t you like English?

Because it’s easy and interesting.／Because it’s difficult and boring.

Ⅱ. Teaching aids教具

录音机／小黑板／卡片／图片／照片／投影仪

Ⅲ. Five瞗inger Teaching Plan 五指教学方案

Step 1 Review第一步 复习（时间：15分钟）

1.（师生互动复习旧问候语。）

T: Good morning， class.

Ss: Good morning， Miss...／Mr....

T: What day is it today?

Ss: It is...

T: What class are we having?

Ss: We’re having an English class.

（提问全班男生。）

T: What time does the class begin?

Boys: At...

（提问全班女生。）

T: What time does it finish？

Girls: At...

2.（分组讨论问题，复习有关科目、星期的特殊疑问句。）

T: OK， very good! Now take out your schedule， look at it and ask and answer in groups.

取出一个小黑板，呈现以下问题：

Questions：

（1）How many lessons do you have every day?

（2）How many English／Chinese...lessons do you have every week?

（3）What time is school over?

（4）What is your favorite subject?

（5）How often do you do outdoor activities?

3.（请一组同学到讲台上进行连锁问答，第一个人问，第二个人答，第二个人接着问，第

三个人答。）

4. ①（使用单词卡片教学生词question， Australia， easy, difficult， interesting,boring。）

②（把生词先变成词组，再变成句子，进行扩充操练。）

（出示question的单词卡。）

Example：

T: Do you have any questions? Yes or no?

Ss: No， we have no questions.

（出示Australia单词卡。）

T: Australia. I come from Australia.

（出示first单词卡，指着第一排的第一个同学。）

T: You are the first in row one. May I ask you the first question? What do you think of our

school life?

S1: I like the school life.

（出示last单词卡，指着这一排的最后一个同学。）

T: Well done， you are the last one. May I ask you the last question? Do you like the school life?

S2: Yes， I like it， too.

（出示easy和difficult的单词卡。）

T: Do you like math? Is it easy or difficult?

S3: Yes， I do. It’s easy.

S4: No， I don’t think so. I think it’s difficult.

（出示interesting和boring的单词卡。）

T: Do you like playing games? Why?

S5: Yes， I do. Because it’s interesting.

T: Wonderful， then do you like learning about the past?

S6: No， I don’t. It’s boring.

③（用情景对话来复习巩固本课的生词。假设班上来了一个教师Mr.White，请一个同学扮演这个角色，大家来采访他，一个同学问一个问题，尽量用上新词。）

Example：

S1: Where do you come from?

Mr.White: I come from Australia.

S2: Are you a teacher?

Mr.White: Yes， I am.

S3: Do you like English?

Mr.White: Yes， I do.

S4: Why do you like English?

Mr.White: Because it’s easy and interesting.

S5: Do you like Chinese?

Mr.White: No， I don’t.

S6: Why don’t you like it?

Mr.White: Because it’s difficult and boring.

Step 2 Presentation第二步 呈现（时间：10分钟）

1.（设置并板书听力任务，让学生带着任务听录音。）

T: Listen to the tape， make True（T）or False（F） for these sentences and correct them.

（1）Ms. Jones comes from America.

（2）She teaches English.

（3）She teaches Grade 2.

（4）She has twelve lessons every week.

（5）She likes the school life.

Step 3 Consolidation 第三步 巩固（时间：10分钟）

1.（老师放录音1a，示范让学生跟读，用铅笔标重读与语调。）

T: Follow the tape and draw “up or down” with your pencil like this.

2.（老师让学生擦去所标重读与语调，先自读，然后跟录音一起读，逐句核对语音语调。）

T: Rub them clean and read and check your pronunciation sentence by sentence. Let’s begin.

3.（全班分成两组操练分别扮演新闻记?

七年级下册英语课件【篇3】

学习目标：

1. 熟练掌握P10-11新单词。

2. 掌握句型：

(1)A: What’s this in English? (2)A: Is this\ that your pen?

B: It’s a watch. B: Yes , it is . No , it isn’t.

A：How do you spell it?

B: W-A-T-C-H.

学习重点：掌握句型：

学习难点：谈论寻物启事公告牌写法

一、自主学习

1. 写出并读出下列单词。

棒球________ 笔记本______ 手表______ 打电话_______ 电脑_____

失物招领_____ 电子游戏______ 一套_____ 学校_____________

2. 翻译短语。

给迈克打电话123 _________________ 在失物招领处 ___________________

一串钥匙 ___________________

二、合作交流

1)Check the answers.

2)Do1a,1b,, pair work.

3)Listen to the tape, do 2a,2b. Some students give the answers.

4)Group work. Practice the dialogs. Finish 2c.

5) Write down the dialogs .

6)Do 3a,3b,3c.

三、达标测评

(一)、根据首字母或汉意填单词。

1.What’s this ?It’s a ___(棒球)

2. How do you s___ it ? W-A-T-C-H, watch (手表).

3. Is that your ___(电脑游戏)in the ______(失物招领处)?

(二)、完成句子。

1. This is my eraser.(变为否定句)

_________________

2. That is my pencil case.(变为一般疑问句并做肯定否定回答)

_____________________________

______________________________

_______________________________

七年级下册英语课件【篇4】

Ⅰ. Teaching aims

1（1） 学习辨认物体及询问如何拼写单词的表达法。

（2） 学习新词 eraser, desk, pen, pencil等。

2. 能够用得体的语言辨认物体。

Ⅱ. The key points and difficult points

1.Key points:（1）Words and expressions : eraser, desk, pen, pencil

（2） Sentences: What’s this/that in English?

How do you spell it?

Can you spell it, please?

2.Difficult points：

不定冠词a/an的用法。

III. Teaching procedures

Step1. Warming-up

Step2. Pre – listening

Present pictures of some objects and teach the new words.

T: What’s this in English?/What’s that in English?

Ss: It’s a map./ an eraser./ a pen./ a map/ a desk..

T: How do you spell it (point to a pen)?/ Can you spell it, please?

Ss: P-E-N, pen./ Ss: Yes, P-E-N-C-I-L, pencil.Practice in groups.

Step3. While – listening

Play the tape recorder and finish 1b. Check the answers and then practice the dialogs.

Step4 Practice

1.Make conversations with these words. The sentences in 1a may help you.

2.Listen and finish 2a..

3.Guessing game.

4.Write the sentences, paying attention to the use of capital letters and punctuation.

Step5 Test

Blackboard design

Unit 1 Making New Friends

Topic 3 How old are you?

Section B

It’s a map./ an eraser./ a pen./ a map/ a desk..

P-E-N, pen.

Yes, P-E-N-C-I-L, pencil.

a map/ pen/ pencil/ desk/ toy/ telephone

an eraser/ apple

七年级下册英语课件【篇5】

七年级下册英语教学工作计划(一) 本学期我担任七年级年级两个班英语教学任务，为了能圆满、顺利的完成七年级英语(下)的教学任务，特拟订本学期教学计划。

一、学生情况分析：

本学期我任教的依旧是七年级两个班的学生。去年期末的成绩分析来看，学生笔头落实不足，知识的巩固不够，语感欠缺，且单词掌握不牢靠，故本学期要加强单词的强化以及学生的笔头落实。

而学生个体而言，学生已经不在有刚步入初中的新鲜感，这无疑为教学增添许多不利。在教学过程中要树立起学生学习的毅力，提升学生学习的幸福指数，养成学习的良好习惯，同时针对不足，多进行笔头落实。

二、指导思想：

本学期在坚持七上的多朗读，尽量避免开口难的情况下，加入背诵，每个模块选取一小段来进行背诵，加强学生的语音语感，课堂行业平时多使用录音，提高学生的语音语调。其次，针对上学期的不足多进行笔头落实。再次，七年级的单词关在本学期尽可能多的解决，加强学生的单词识记能力，针对单词识记能力较弱的部分学生进行帮扶，秉承着单词先行的原则，在课堂中也可以让学生学着自读自学单词，便于学生背诵单词和学会学习。最后，关注作文。在背诵和单词

双重落实的情况下，再加入适当的翻译。一定量的机械的汉译中在英语学习初级阶段还是必要的。本学期将坚持上述指导思想来看是否能为学生的成绩有所裨益。

三、教材内容分析：

本学期使用的是外研版七年级下册英语教材，共有12个教学模块和两个复习模块。每个模块都列出明确的语言目标、主要的功能项目与语法结构、需要掌握的基本词汇，并分为三个单元。Unit1部分是基本对话内容，Unit2部分是

1 / 6

短文，主要是阅读训练。Unit3是扩展和综合的语言运用。本学期要掌握的语法点有：

1、名词所有格和名词性物主代词;2、can/can’t的用法;3、一般将来时;4、一般过去时;5、祈使句和感叹句。

四、具体措施：

1、做好教材钻研工作。认真研读新课程标准，钻研新教材，根据新课程标准，扩充教材内容，认真上课，批改作业，认真辅导，认真制作测试试卷，也让学生学会认真。

2、每格模块中选择部分内容要求学生背诵。从而培养学生良好的英语语感，并且为写作提供便利。在学生朗读和背诵的过程中纠正语音语调，激发学生学习热情。

3、对文本和课堂中重点的单词和词组进行听写，听写坚持“少吃多餐”的原则，一个模块单词分几个部分，每次一个部分听写，模块结束后再总的默写一次，加强学生对单词的识记能力。同时发挥小组长的作用，对每次单词订正等情况进行检查强化。4、认真贯彻早晚读制度，充分发挥早晚读的黄金时间加强监督，保证读的效果。

5、对后进生进行专门辅导，布置单独的作业，让他们在小进步，小转变中体味学习的快乐，树立学习的自信，尽快成长起来。对一些再单词朗读记忆等方面有所欠缺的学生实行一对一帮扶，让其他成绩好的同学来帮助他们，提高学习效率。

6、分层教学，关注每个学生的成绩提升，对不同学生进行不同任务要求，力争让每个学生都走在前进的道路上。要关注学生的情感，营造宽松、民主、和谐的教学氛围。

7、加强学生策略指导，如将音标融入实际课堂单词教学中，在阅读单元或加强阅读技巧指导，或关注对文章逻辑分析，让学生写作的逻辑条理变得清晰。为学生的终身学习奠定基础。

七年级下册英语课件【篇6】

一、概述

本课是义务教育课程标准实验教科书北京仁爱八年级上册Unit 2, Topic 2, Section A内容，所需课时为一课时；新单词有cause,health,tonight,sleepy,medicine,fingernail,meal,without,主要句型有Is……good or bad for your health? Doing …… is good/bad ……. 本课主要联系学生日常生活，以上一话题所学的表生病就医、描述身体不适以及表建议的一些句型等为基础，通过discussion,listening,making dialogues,picture talking等多种活动使学生复习旧知，联系新知，延伸话题内容，能使用两两对话完成一个较简单的话题，提高学生的语言交际能力，并有利于学生养成健康的生活习惯。

二、教学目标分析

从知识与技能、过程与方法、情感态度与价值观三个维度对该课题预计达到的教学目标作出一个整体描述。

1. 知识与技能

（1）认读七个新单词和两个新句型，做到发音准确、清晰；

（2）熟练运用新句型与同桌进行相互问答；

（3）能够借助key points进行看图问答或综合说话；

2．过程与方法

（1）能够通过师生说、两两说和自主听读体验交际式英语教学的一般过程，掌握英语说、听的基本方法；

（2）能够通过两两说和综合说体验合作学习的过程和方法；

（3）能够仔细倾听老师和同学的发言，有语言表达和与同学交流的愿望。

3．情感态度与价值观

（1）激发和保持学生英语学习的动机，实现“趣能”两得；

（2）在学生两两交流和小组合作交流中，培养孩子合作意识和合作精神，能够相互配合完成一段通顺流畅的说话训练

（3）通过本课的学习，有利于树立科学的健康观，养成健康的生活方式。

三、学习者特征分析

1. 学生是漳浦第三中学八年级的学生

2. 学生在上一个话题中已经掌握表述身体的种种不适、“生病”与“看病”的基本句型。

3. 学生已经学会使用should/shouldn’t/had better/had better not 表达建议和劝告的句型。

4. 八年级的学生比较活泼、乐于发言，宽松、活泼的课堂气氛有利于展开小组讨论、情景对话等。

5. 学生整体水平较低，词汇量较差，要设计易于学生开口的情景，预测学生可能使用的单词、短语并呈现出来以供参考。以师生、学生两两对话示范以带动“说”的氛围、激发学生的表达欲望。

四、教学策略选择与设计

本课旨在让学生学会表述身体不适、生病的原因以及形成健康生活的观念。

小组讨论策略：通过讨论，辨别何谓健康的生活方式、卫生习惯，熟悉相关的词汇，为下一步听、说奠定基础；

师生示范策略：让学生明白对话的内容和形式，激发学生的表现、表演欲望；

歌曲激趣策略：通过学生的chant、sing a song，有利于形成宽松活泼的课堂氛围，同时借助chant和歌曲来培养学生良好的个人卫生习惯及健康生活观念。

五、教学资源与工具设计

1．本课教材；

2．拓展资源：教师教学用书八年级上册

3．教学环境：多媒体、VCD、幻灯片、Flash动画、录音机。

六、教学过程

Step1：Warm up

1. Greetings（师生问候）；

2．Sing a song（多媒体播放Chant课件，让学生听、说、做、演进行律动，活跃气氛，营造一个良好的学习英语的氛围）Wash your hands, have a bath. Open the window, take a fresh breath …….

3. Leading-in : (T) In our daily life, there are some good living habits and bad living habits. Good living habits can make a man healthy, wealthy and wise.

Now let’s look at 3a and discuss whether it’s good or not . After discussion,

make dialogues after the example using the sentence pattern “ Is doing …… good or bad for your health?” Do 3a.

例如： A: Is going to bed early good or bad for our health?

B: It’s good..

Going to bed early is good for your health..

( 注意选择疑问句回答时不能用Yes或 No，而要作出具体回答。朗读时or前用升调，or 后面用降调，句末用问号。强调动词或动词短语不能做主语，但可以在动词后面加上ing变成动名词或动名词短语，其作主语时，谓语动词用单数。)

*请学生例举生活中还有哪些是好的或不好的个人卫生习惯。

4. 语法归纳：选择疑问句句型

【句型一】一般疑问句 + 一个供选择的对象 + or + 另一个供选择的对象？

Are you from America or Australia? 你是来自美国还是澳大利亚？

Will you give us a talk, or Jim? 是你给我们做演讲，还是吉姆？

句型二】特殊疑问句 + 一个供选择的对象 + or + 另一个供选择的对象？

Which do you prefer, tea or milk? 你喜欢喝茶还是喝牛奶？

Who teaches you English, Miss Li or Miss Wang? 谁教你们英语，是李老师还是王老师？

5. 根据图片内容两两对话。

Step 2 : Presentation

(1) 教师用多媒体播放1a图片，请学生预测对话内容：

T: What’s wrong with Kangkang?

Ss: He has a headache.

T: What caused it?

Ss: He stayed up late watching TV .

T: Is staying up late good or bad for his health?

Ss: It’s bad.

T: What should he do?

Ss: He should have a good rest.

(2) 播放1a录音，让学生跟读并模仿语音语调。

（3）鼓励学生练习并两两表演1a对话。掌握句型：

Is staying up late good or bad for his health?

Staying up late is bad for your health.

I must have a good rest tonight.

(4) 让学生再读1a，提供关键词，以短文形式复述康康困倦的原因并给出建议。如：

Kangkang feels tired today, because he watched a soccer game on TV last night and went to bed very late. Staying up late is bad for his health. He should go to bed early and have a good rest.

Step3. Consolidation:

1.教师用多媒体呈现各种表情的图片，提供关键词，让学生两人一组练习1b，完成1b.

Ex. :

A: I feel sleepy because I went to bed very late last night..

B: Oh, staying up late is bad for your health. You should……

2. 听2 录音，完成2，核对答案。学习并掌握单词medicine; 再听录音，复述Wang Junfeng应该做什么。

Now listen to the tape and find out whether Wang Junfeng’s habits are good or not. Do listening exercise. Check what Wang Junfeng did and what he should do.

Step 4 : Practice

.1.- Do you go to school by bike or ____ ?

- I go to school ________ .

2. – Would you like apples or ________ ?

- I’d like _______ .

3.- Is Jim in the classroom or ___________________? (在操场）

.4. Who _____________________________ ?(谁今天早上没来上学，汤姆还是吉姆？）

5. _____________________（打篮球）is a good sport.

6. Swimming in the river with no others ____ dangerous.

7. Eating too little or much _____________________. (对健康不好）

8. _________________________（吃一顿丰富的早餐）can keep you energetic all the morning.

9. ________________ (熬夜）makes him feel sleepy.

10. If you don’t feel well , __________________________________. (你最好去看医生）

Step 5: Homework

以How to keep healthy? 为题目，联系本课所学内容，形成一篇80个字左右的小短文。

七年级下册英语课件【篇7】

【学习目标】

1.复习本单元重要词组和句型。

2.学习信件的写法。

3.练习写信件

【预习指导】自我预习：

rule 规则

obey rules 遵守规则 follow the rules 守规则

break rules 违反规定 don’t fight 不打架

have to 不得不;必须 arrive/be late for. . . 迟到

no talking 不许讲话 listen to 听-------

be strict with /in 对-----严格 be noisy /quiet 吵闹/安静

【 交流展示】

一、教材处理：

1，复习邮件的写法，复习情态动词的用法。

2,复习有关校规、家规的说法。

3,读本单元重要词组和句型。

【 知识反馈】

一. 单词变化

1.rule(复数)_________ 2.outside(反义词) _________ 3.wash(单三)__________ 4..get to (同义词)________ 5. late(反义词)________ 6.piano(复数) __________

二.单词填空

1.We have to wear sports shoes for g____________ class.

2.You’d better not break the r_______________.

3. ______________ (not fight ) with each other in the classroom.

4.We can eat in the d_______________ hall every day

5.Don’t run in the h__________ . It’s dangerous.

6.No _________(talk) in class!

7.Grace is wearing the school u_______________ today.

8.The girl often comes back early on s____________ nights.

9.What __________ your teacher look like? She is tall and thin.

10. ____________(read) in the sun is bad for your eyes.

三.选择填空

( )1.We can eat in the dinging hall. But we _______ eat in the classroom.

A. don’t B. didn’t C. can’t D. aren’t ( )2.When Jim goes ________ the classroom the teacher is having class.

A. to B. in C. out D. into ( )3.-_______ I take some photos in the hall? –No, you_________.

A. Can, can’t B. Must, mustn’t C. Could, won’t D. May, mustn’t ( )4.Don’t forget________ me this evening.

A. to call B. call C. calls D. calling ( )5.Don’t talk ________ in the library.

A. loud B. loudly C. low D. lowly ( )6.I have _______ rules in my home. We have _______ homework to do today.

A. too many, too much B. too much , many too

C. too many, much too D. much too, many too

( )7.-Can your brother swim? -________.

A. Yes, he can’t B. Yes, please . C. No, he can’t D. Yes, he does ( )8.It’s raining all day , so I ________ stay at home.

A. must B. have to C. must to D. can ( )9.He’s never ________ class.

A. arrive B. late for C. arrive late D. late ( )10.He has to _______ by 10:00 o’clock.

A. be in bed B. is bed C. stay bed D. lie bed

【 学后反思】

1.本节课的收获是______________________________________________

2.有待提高的是____________________________________________________

七年级下册英语课件【篇8】

一、本学期的指导思想：

在本学期的英语教学中，坚持以下理念的应用：1、要面向全体学生，关注每个学生的情感，激发他们学习英语的兴趣，帮助他们建立学习的成就感和自信心,培养创新精神;2、整体设计目标，体现灵活开放，目标设计以学生技能，语言知识，情感态度，学习策略和文化意识的发展为基础;3、突出学生主体，尊重个体差异;4、采用活动途径，倡导体验参与，即采用任务型的教学模式，让学生在老师的指导下通过感知、体验、实践、参与和合作等方式，实现任务的目标，感受成功;5、注重过程评价，促进学生发展，建立能激励学生学习兴趣和自主学习能力发展的评价体系。总之，让学生在使用英语中学习英语，让学生成为Good User而不仅仅是Learner。让英语成为学生学习生活中最实用的工具而非累赘，让他们在使用和学习英语的过程中，体味到轻松和成功的快乐，而不是无尽的担忧和恐惧。

二、所教班级学生基本情况分析：

经过一学期的学习，从上期期末成绩来看，我所担任班级学生总体上对英语基础知识掌握较差。只有少数学生学习目的明确，掌握了英语学习的一些基本方法，能够积极主动认真地学习，学习成绩优秀。而大部分学生对英语感到困难，没有明确的学习目的，缺少学习的热情和主动性，自觉性较差，相应的学习习惯也差。主要原因是没有激发学生学习英语的兴趣，学生觉得英语学习是一种负担，而不是一种乐趣。一部分学生没有掌握记忆单词的方法，连基本的单词听写也不过关，导致看不懂，听不懂，学不懂。学生的听力也还有待提高，在这方面失分也较多。主要是听的时间太少，接触英语的时间

主要的功能项目与语法结构，需要掌握的基本词汇。每个单元都分为A、B两部分。A部分是基本的语言内容，B部分是知识的扩展和综合的语言运用。每个单元还有self-check部分，供学生自我检测本单元所学的语言知识之用。它采用“语言的输入——学生的消化吸收——学生的语言输出”为主线编排的。通过确定教学目标，采用听、说、读、写，自我检测等手段，有效提高学习效率，体现了以学生为主体的思想。不过这套教材是基于城市学生的状况编写的，对于我们农村学生来说，学起来的确有些吃力，光是一千多个单词就吓退了不少学

1 / 3

生学习英语的兴趣。但我们还必须知难而上，为了提高农村的英语教学成绩而努力

四、教学目标

培养学生对英语的学习兴趣，形成有效的学习策略，有效提高学习效率，发展双基能力，培养听、说、读、写的能力，使学生初步获得运用英语的能力，达到语言运用能力的迁移和拓展。使对英语学习表现出积极性和初步的自信心，能听懂有关熟悉话题的语段和简短的故事，能通过本学期教学，能基本达到如下目标：使对英语学习表现出积极性和初步的自信心，能听懂有关熟悉话题的语段和简短的故事，能与教师或同学就熟悉的话题(如学校、家庭生活)交换信息，能读懂小故事及其他文体的简单书面材料，能参照范例或借助图片写出简单的句子，能参与简单的角色扮演等活动，能尝试使用适当的学习方法，学会克服学习中的困难，意识到语言交际中存在文化差异。

五、教学重难点：

1.Modal verb can, must, have to, would like; Can for permiion 2.What time, When, Why, What, Where questions; 3.How questions: How long 六、本学期教学改革的设想和具体措施： (一)确保基础知识过关

1、单词过关：每天记5-8个生词，利用课外时间，由课代表主持，各学习小组长听写、改正。

2、词组过关：把学过的词组归纳，方便学生记忆。用词组造句和中译英训练。在各个组内进行竞赛。

3、句型过关：组织学生结对子，一有空就你问我答，营造学习氛围。典句必背，翻译句子。

4、课文范文过关：课文分段，小组朗读比赛。

5、习题过关;认真组织单元测试，批改并有效及时反馈，弄懂每一道题。

2 / 3

(二)采取科学教学法

1、Dailyreport：值日生介绍自己、家庭成员或朋友的情况，其它学生可互相提问题，询问个人职业;

2、建立良好的师生关系，协调课堂气氛，培养学生开口说英语的勇气和信心;3、教师设计，学生自学讨论。听说领先，读写跟上。抓好英语的常规教学，鼓励学生自主探索，合作探究，共同提高。

4、引导学生实现语言的迁移，加强日常生活中英语口语的运用; 第一周unit1第二周unit1-unit2 第三周unit2-unit3第四周unit3+复习1-3+第一次月考 第五__unit4第六__unit4-5 第七周：Unit5第八周unit6第九周：unit1-6复习+期中考试第十周： 第十二__unit8 第十四__; 第十六__unit11 + 第十八周unit7第十一周：Unit7-8 第十三__：unit9 unit9-unit10第十五周：Uit10-unit11 __联考第十七__：unit12 复习+期中考试

七年级下册英语课件【篇9】

教学目标

Teaching aims (教学目标)

1. 能在日常情境中熟练在餐馆里点餐。

2. 能用所学内容解决实际问题。

3. 区别可数名词与不可数名词。

教学重难点

Language points (语言点)

1. 词汇：1) 名词n. tofu, meat

2. 句型：What would you like?

What kind of noodles would you like?

I’d like beef and tomato noodles, please.

What size would you li ke?

I’d like a small/medium/large bowl.

Difficulties (教学难点)

1. 清楚地区别可数名词与不可数名词。

2. 熟练掌握点餐句型。

教学过程

Te aching steps (教学步骤)

1. Warm-up and revision (课堂热身和复习)

(1) Show Ss some pictures of food.

(2)Show pictures of different kinds of noodles and have Ss name them. Show Ss the difference between a small/medium/large bowl too.

【教学设计说明】通过谈论图片，既能复习之前单元所学内容，又可以自然过渡到下一个环节，并能帮助学生理解阅读内容。

2. Work on 2d (完成2d)

(1)The girl in the picture is Sally, and the boy is her friend, Tom. They are in a restaurant ordering food. Explain to Ss what “order” means. Role-play the conversation in 2d.

(2) Follow the example in 2d and make up a conversation to order some food.

(3) Read the conversation and answer the following questions.

Q1. Are there any tomatoes in the beef soup?

Yes, there are.

Q2. How many bowls of beef soup do they need?

One.

Q3. What else does Tom like?

He likes gongbao chicken and some mapo tofu with rice.

【教学设计说明】学生通过回答问题能理解对话的内容，通过角色扮演能在情境中学会运用，通过自编对话能更好的让学生学以致用。

3. Grammar Focus

(1) Read through the sentences.

(2) Ask Ss to focus on the countable and uncountable nouns.

【教学设计说明】本部分为本单元的内容核心，不仅概括了本单元的重点，还将基本句型一 一呈现。由于是总结性内容，故要求学生朗读。可在课后将本部分列入听写内容。此处可配合学生上一课时的课后作业，纠正学生错误，帮助学生归纳总结。

4. Work on 3a (完成3a)

(1) Complete the conversation in 3a.

(2) Check Ss’ answers.

(3) Have Ss get into pairs and role-play the conversation to familiarize t hemselves with the ordering process. Ask them to change the words used.

【教学设计说明】本部分旨在强化点餐句型，使学生关注点餐细节。

5. Work on 3b (完成3b)

Write questions and answers using the words in brackets.

【教学设计说明】巩固3a内容。

6. Work on 3c (完成3d)

Have Ss get into groups and make conversations about the picture.【教学设计说明】 本环节要求学生能够活学活用，真正达到掌握目标语言的能力。

课后习题

Homework (课后作业)

Get into groups and work on 3c . Then, make a conversation about ordering food.

频道小编推荐： |

七年级下册英语课件【篇10】

教学目标

语

言

知

识 类别 内 容 课次 要求

词

汇 weather, spring,warm,season,summer,mountain,winter, cold,rain,

ground,snow 1A 掌

握

cloudy, snowy, sunny, windy, rainy, bright, quite,wet, dry, low, temperature,from...to... 1B

holiday, remember, wear, part, sun, shine, brightly, shorts, suddenly, spend, as, the same as,travel,overcoat,if,report 1C

come back to life,busy,leaf 1D

soon, hope, together, stay, places of interest,each 2A

anytime, fantastic, expensive, camera, famous, tent, raincoat, notebook, whom, prepare 2B

enter, take off, point, touch, finger, arrive, gift money, paper, pass, person, May Day, during, had, be different from 2C

greeting, foreigner, polite, into 2D

festival, Spring Festival, Christmas, get together, potato, mark, sweet, luck, riddle, stay up, honor, family get together, Mid-autumn Festival,send,believe 3A

inside, shout, chocolate, candy, grape 3B

international, labor, race, National Day,capital,flag,hang 3C

whole, greet, lucky, burn, god 3D

go hiking 1A 理

解

foggy, degree centigrade 1B

softly 1C

hopeful, heavily, crop, ripe, harvest, strongly 1D

local, Germany, France, New Zealand, Egypt,India,Russia 2A

exciting, backpack, the Palace Museum, Mount Tai 2B

custom, Brazil, Indonesia, Muslim, Thailand, Korea, Italy, wrap, Tibet, temple,Tibetan 2C

necklace, impolite, earn 2D

dragon, Thanksgiving, roast, turkey, Lantern Festival, Lunar, eve, midnight, fool, adult, mooncake, Christian, Easter, Christ, colorful 3A

Halloween, scary, broomstick, witch, ghost, apple bobbing, pumpkin, treat, trick or treat, Jewish, honey 3B

normally, decorate, stocking, fireplace, Santa Claus,exchange 3C

event 3D

语

言

知

识 类别 内 容

语

法 1. 一般过去时的特殊疑问句

How was your trip?

It was wonderful.

How long were you there?

Only five days.

What places did you visit?

We visited some famous temples.

2. 动词过去式（不规则变化）

be→was/weredo→didhave→had

buy→boughtsend→sent

get→gottell→told

hang→hung

功能和话题 1. 季节和天气及相关的活动

What’s the weather like in summer?

How is the weather in winter?

What do you think of the weather today?

What’s the temperature,do you know?

Which season do you like best,spring, summer,fall or winter?

What’s your favorite season?

It is a good season for hiking.

It’s a good time to climb moutains.

We can make a snowman in winter.

2. 旅行计划和谈论度假

I want to go to Australia.

I plan to travel around the country and take pictures of the local people.

I would like to travel to some places of interest.

I hope to get together with then.

What’s the best time to go there?

What’s the weather like in Kunming?

Is it expensive there?

What places should I visit in Yunnan?

Where did you go on holiday?

What did you do last Sunday?

How was your trip?

3. 文化、风俗习惯

When you travel in other countries,you should know the customs of those countries.

In Japan,when you enter someone’s home,you should take off your shoes.

In Brazil,people never go out with their hair wet.

In Indonesia,you mustn’t point to anything with your foot.

Don’t touch a child on the head in Thailand.

Before the Chinese New Year,many Chinese families burn the old picture of kitchen god, Zao Shen’ to bring good luck.

4. 节日庆祝

Chinese people make dumplings and perform lion and dragon dances.

People in many countries celebrate Christmas and give each other presents.

They often wear scary clothes and knock on their neighbors’doors and shout,“Trick or treat?”

Best wishes to you.

Topic 1

Section A

The main activities are 1a and 3.本课重点活动是la和3。

Ⅰ. Teaching aims and demands教学目标

1. Learn the words of seasons and the words describing the weather and activities:

weather,spring, summer, fall, winter, warm,season,cold,rain, ground, snow, go hiking, swimming, climb mountains, make a snowman

2. Learn how to describe weather:

What’s the weather like in summer?

It’s hot. We can go swimming.

How is the weather in fall?

It is cool. It’s a good time to climb mountains.

3. Learn to use the comparative and superlative forms to express preference about seasons:

I like spring better.

Which season do you like best, spring, summer, fall or winter?

I think I like summer best.

Ⅱ. Teaching aids 教具

四张教学挂图。每张的上方分别标有春、夏、秋、冬四个英语单词。挂图背面标有暖、热、凉、冷四个英语单词,下方有hiking,swimming, climb mountains, make a snowman 短语。

挂图背面的下方为四季活动的图片。图与词应是相对应的。作为教学挂图的纸张应为纸板式,有一定硬度。

Ⅲ. Five-finger Teaching Plan五指教学方案

Step1 Review 第一步 复习（时间: 5分钟）

1.（师生互动问好导入复习呈现。）

T: Good morning, class.

Ss: Good morning, teacher.

T: What day is it today?

Ss: It’s Tuesday.

T: So we will learn a new section today. But first I would like to know the date today.

2.（找一学生协助导入复习。）

T: What’s the date today?

S2: It’s June 11th.

（找学生2。）

T: When were you born?

Ss: September 21st.

（找学生3。）

T: What’s the 11th month of the year?

S3: November.

3.（活动继续,同时老师分栏板书月份名称在黑板上。）

T: There are twelve months in a year.

But there are four seasons in a year, too.

Look at the blackboard. What are the four seasons?

Listen to 1a, find the answers and tell me.

（导入下步。）

Step 2 Presentation 第二步 呈现（时间: 10分钟）

1. T: Now, tell me the answers.

Ss: Spring, summer, fall and winter.

（学生根据录音模仿,老师板书在黑板上相应位置,同时纠正。）

T: Listen to the tape again, finish lb, try to find the words describing the weather.

2.（放录音1a第二遍,学生听,完成1b。）

T: Can you find the words describing the weather?

Ss: Yes.

T: What are they?

Ss: They are warm, hot, cool and cold.

3.（学生模仿录音机发音,老师板书,纠正。）

T: Listen to the tape for the third time. Find the sentences of doing activities.

Ss: All right.

4.（放完录音,师生商讨核对答案,然后老师板书重点句型在黑板上。）

T: What are your answers?

It is a good season for hiking.

I like swimming in the river.

It’s a good time to climb mountains.

We can make a snowman in winter.

Step 3 Consolidation 第三步 巩固（时间: 5分钟）

1.（小组活动。一边看课本Page 77的四幅图画,两人互问互答,熟练掌握句型。学生重点操练句型,除了黑板上呈现的外,还有以下。）

What’s the wether like in spring?

It’s warm.

How is the weather in fall?

It’s cool.

2.（让学生不看课本,借助黑板上的关键词,复述对话内容。）

Step 4Practice第四步练习（时间: 10分钟）

1.（完成2,听对话,填表格。）

T: Listen to 2, complete the chart.

T: Here are the answers, please check it.

Name Favorite Season Favorite Activity

Zhou Weilun summer go swimming

Maria spring fly kites

2.（学生两人对话,仿照4,表达自己对季节的喜好和原因。）

T: Work in pairs. Follow the example to make a dialog.

3.（完成3。）

T: Listen to 3, read and find Kangkang’s and Jane’s favorite season. And why?

（学生听,读,找答案。）

T: Now, tell me your answers.

（找一学生检查填写情况及的短文理解程度。）

S: Jane likes summer best. Because she likes swimming very much.Kangkang’s favorite season is winter. Because when it snows, the ground is white with snow and he can make snowmen. He likes doing that very much.

4.（四人小组活动。讨论自己最喜欢的季节及原因。并且需要对本季节的天气进行描述。）

T: Now, work in four. Discuss about your favorite season.

Describe the weather and your favorite activities.

Example:

S1: I like spring best. It is warm. I can go hiking. I like hiking very much.

S2: My favoriter season is winter. It is cold. It is not very cold. It often snows in winter. All is white. I like white. I like making snowmen with snow.

S3: I like summer better. It is hot. It is not cold. I can go swimming in the river. I like swimming very much.

S4: I like fall better. It is cool, not very hot and not very cold. I can go climbing mountains. That’s my favorite activity.

Step 5 Project 第五步 综合探究活动（时间: 15分钟）

1.（班级比赛活动。全班分成男、女两组。每组一次一人。挑出自己最喜欢的季节,取出相应的教学挂图,藏在身后,不让对方看到。然后互相猜。猜中了要描述天气和适宜的活动情况。每人有三次机会。猜不中的被淘汰,记零分。最后哪组得分最多,算赢家。）

T: Now, Let’s play a game.

Boys are the first group. Girls are the second group.

One boy and one girl work in a small group.

They must guess the other’s favorite season, then describe the weather and activities. Each can guess three times.

Let’s see which group can be the winner.

Example:

（第一小组）

A1: Is your favorite season spring?

B1: No.

A1: Is your favorite season summer?

B1: No.

A1: Is your favorite season fall, either?

B1: Yes.

A1: It is cool in fall. It’s a good time to climb mountains.

（换过来）

B1: What is your favorite season? Is it winter?

A1: No.

B1: Is it fall?

A1: No.

B1: Is it winter?

A1: Yes.

B1: It is cold. We can make a snowman in winter.

（第二小组）

A2: Which is your favorite season? Spring or fall?

B2: I don’t like spring. I don’t like fall, either.

A2: Is it summer?

B2: Yes.

A2: It is hot. It is a good season for swimming.

（换过来）

B2: I guess your favorite season is summer, too.

A2: Yes. It is right.

B2: It is hot. It is a good time to go swimming.

（第三小组）

A3: Your favorite season is summer?

B3: No.

A3: Spring?

B3: No.

A3: Winter?

B3: No.

（A3被淘汰。换过来问。）

B3: Which is your favorite season, spring, summer, fall or winter?

A3: Spring.

（B3出乎意料地运用妙计一次性猜中。）

（活动继续,直到完成。）

2.（完成Page 78 5）

T: Now, Let’s chant.

（全班同学一齐大声朗读歌谣The Seasons。教室里一片欢快的气氛。）

3.（留作业。写一篇不少于五句的短文,和天气、季节有关。）

T: This is your homework.

Write a short passage about weather. You should have five sentences or more in your passage.

（附本课板书: ）

Unit 8 The seasons and the Weather

Tpoic 1 What’s the weather like today?

Section A

March

April

May

↓

spring

↓

warm

↓

It’s a good season

For hiking June

July

August

↓

summer

↓

hot

↓

I like swimming

in the river. September

October

November

↓

fall

↓

cool

↓

It’s a good time

To climb mountains. December

January

February

↓

winter

↓

cold

↓

We can make a

Snowman in winter.

What’s the weather like in spring?

How is the weather in winter?

It is warm.

It is cold.

Section B

The main activities are 1a and 2a. 本课重点活动是1a和2a。

Ⅰ. Teaching aims and demands教学目标

1. Learn words of describing weather:

cloudy, snowy, foggy, sunny, windy, rainy,bright, quiet, wet, dry, low, temperature

2. Review the simple past tense and present continuous tense:

How was the weather yesterday?

It was cloudy all day.

What are they doing?

They are flying kites and a boy is riding a bike over there.

3. Learn to understand weather reports:

What’s the temperature, do you know?

The lowest temperature is 20℃ and the highest temperature is 25℃.

Ⅱ. Teaching aids教具

课前要求学生将1c各词制作成卡片。卡片上尽量显示图画和单词两部分。教师制作天气预报简图。简图上标明北京当天的天气及最高温度和最低温度。

Ⅲ. Five-finger Teaching Plan五指教学方案

Step 1 Review第一步 复习（时间: 5分钟）

1.（男,女生各一人作英语课堂值日报告,复习上节课关于季节,天气和活动的描述。）

S1: Good morning, everyone. Today is Tuesday, June 10th.It’s summer now. I like summer best. Because it is hot. I can go swimming in the river.（面向全班同学）What’s your favorite season, everyone?

Ss: Spring／Summer／Fall／Winter.

S1: Why?

Ss: Because spring is warm. It is a good season for hiking.／Because Fall is cool. It’s a good time to climb mountains.／Because it is cold in winter. I can make a snowman in winter.

S2: Hello, everyone. I like spring better. It’s nice and warm,and I can fly kites in spring.

2.（学生作完报告举起一张画有一男孩正在放风筝的图片,同时标有fly kites的词导入下

步。）

Step 2 Presentation 第二步 呈现（时间: 10分钟）

T: What’s the weather like in spring?

（指着图片复习进行时,图片上有多云和下雨的图片,呈现另一类描述天气的词。例: rainny, snowy等,导入用一般过去时询问天气的句型。）

Ss: It’s warm.

T: What’s the boy doing?

Ss: He is flying a kite.

T: What’s the weather like in summer?

（老师指着学生3举起的图片。图片上有夏日一群孩子在湖里划船和一小孩在湖边公路上骑车的场面,图片上标有row boats, ride a bike, hot, dry词。）

Ss: It’s very hot. It is dry, too.

T: What are they doing?

Ss: They are rowing boats. A boy is riding a bike over there.

（老师手指窗外。）

T: What’s the weather like today?

Ss: It’s raining. It’s rainning heavily.

T: So it is rainy today. What a cool day! It is wet, too.

（老师让作下雨图片的学生举起,可结合实际情况变换。图片上标有rain,wet词。）

T: Today is Tuesday. What day was it yesterday?

Ss: It was Monday.

T: What was the weather like yesterday?

Ss: It was cloudy.

（老师分别让学生举起下雪,有雾,晴朗,有风,多云的图片。）

T: What was the weather like yesterday?

Ss: It was snowy.

It was foggy.

It was sunny

It was windy.

（师生互动练习。）

Step 3 Consolidation 第三步 巩固（时间: 10分钟）

1.（完成1b。）

T: Look at the picture in your textbook. Listen and match the words on the right of the box with the correct picture.

（两分钟后老师和学生核对答案。）

T: Here are the answers.／Tell me your answers.

（或者）Discuss with your partner to find the correct answers.

snowy-e foggy-b cloudy-a

sunny-d windy-f rainy-c

2.（完成1c。）

T: Practice the conversation in 1a with the words in the box with your partner.

3.（做游戏,快乐中巩固复习。）

T: Let’s play a game.

There are three sections in 1c.

If you have the card with words of section 1, please stand on the left.

If you have the card with words of section 3, please stand on the right.

If you have the card with words of section 2, please stand in the middle.

Now, there are three groups.

The first student of each group, please come to the front of class. Hold up your cards.

Then the whole class can make a sentence.

Example:

（1）It was rainy yesterday. Today is wet.

They are climbing mountains.

（2）It was windy yesterday.

Today is dry.

We are rowing boats.

（3）It was sunny yesterday.

Today is foggy.

We are flying kites.

（4）Yesterday was nice and bright.

Today is rainy.

We are making snowmen.

（5）Yesterday was wet.

Today is windy.

We are going hiking.

（有些句子可能很不符合逻辑,学生大笑,同时巩固复习句型,培养交际能力。）

Step 4 Practice 第四步 练习（时间: 10分钟）

1.（老师出示北京天气预报简图呈现关于湿度的词,句型。）

T: Now, look at the picture. Listen, read and say after the tape.

（老师板书关键词。）

city weather lowest temperature highest temperature

Beijing nice, sunny 28℃ 37℃

（模仿读三遍,纠正发音,语调。）

T: Now, look at the words in the box.

What do you think of the weather today?

Ss: It’s nice and sunny.

T: What’s the temperature,do you know?

Ss: The lowest temperature is 28℃. The highest temperature is 37℃.

2.（两人对话练习。）

T: Work in pairs. Practice 2a and discuss about the weather of other cities.

3.（完成2b。）

T: Now, look at the picture of weather report on Page 80, answer my questions.

What’s the weather like in Toronto?

Ss: It’s snowy.

T: What’s the temperature?

Ss: It is from-10℃ to -4℃.

T: What’s the highest temperature?

Ss: It is -4℃.

（完成后换成纽约市让学生提问老师答。师生互动,增强交际性培养。）

Ss: What is the weather like in New York?

T: It is sunny.

Ss: What’s the temperature?

T: It is from 3℃ to 7℃.

Ss: What’s the lowest temperature?

T: It is 3℃.

Ss: What’s the highest temperature?

T: It is 7℃.

4. Practice the conversation in 2a with the words in the box with your pantner.（活学活用。）

Harbin sunny quite cool from 5℃ to 15℃ go hiking

Xi’an windy hot,dry from 8℃~20℃ fly kites

Guangzhou rainy hot, wet from 10℃~30℃ take an umbrella

Step 5 Project 第五步 综合探究活动（时间: 10分钟）

1.（放松学习。）

T: Boys and girls, let’s do an activity with all classmates together.

Turn to Page 80. Look at 4.

Let’s read the rhyme“The Light Rain.”

（然后分组朗诵比赛。）

2. （分成七人一组。每人做一天的天气预报。扩展什么天气里注意什么等,关于注意事项的描述。弹性课堂,知识迁移。）

Survey th e weather in your area for a whole week in June,work in group of seven. Each makes a weather report of one day.

Example:

S1: Today is Monday. It’s nice and bright. The temperature is from 10℃ to 27℃. It’s a good day to work and study in school.

S2: Today is Tuesday. It’s cloudy. It’s hot. The lowest temperature is 9℃. The highest

temperature is 31℃.It will be rainy this afternoon. If you go out in the afternoon, please

take your umbrella.

S3: Today is Sunday. It’s sunny. It will be nice and warm all day. The lowest temperature is 10℃.The highest temperature is 25℃. It’s a good time to go hiking.

3.（调查两个城市近五天天气情况。分别做一份天气预报。写到作业本上,为下一节课作准备。）

T: Find two cities. Make a survey of the past two days and future two days, and today’s

weather. Make a weather report for each city。

Write your weather reports down.（学了就用。）

And that is your homework.

Get ready for next section.

Section C

The main activities are 1a, 2 and3. 本课重点活动是 1a,2和3。

Ⅰ. Teaching aims and demands 教学目标

1. Learn some useful words amd expressions:

holiday, remember, wear, part, sun, shine, brghtly, shorts, suddenly, spend, as, travel, overcoat, if, report

2. Review how to use the highest and lowest to express temperature:

The highest temperature is 5℃.

The lowest temperature is 2℃.

3. Learn to make weather report and suggestions for travelling.

Here is the weather report on February 20th for some big cities in the word.

It is a good place to spend your holidays.

Ⅱ. Teaching aids教具

一张世界天气预报图／一个旅行包／一顶太阳帽／一幅太阳镜／一把雨伞／一条冬天用的毛围巾／一架照相机／12幅教学单词卡

Ⅲ. Five瞗inger Teaching Plan 五指教学方案

Step 1 Review 第一步 复习（时间: 5分钟）

1.（男,女生各一人扮演天气预报员作天气预报,完成英语课堂值日报告。报告的依据是

上节课的作业。）

S1: Here is Xi’an. In the past two days,it was windy and cloudy. The temperature was from 10℃ to 23℃. But today is sunny and very hot. The highest temperature can be 35℃. For the future two days, it is the same. This afternoon, there is a little rain. It can be cool.

S2: Here is Chengdu. Today is foggy. The temperature is from 15℃ to 25℃. It was rainy in the past two days. But it is sunny for the future two days. It is a good time for traveling.

2.（老师可以根据以上报告向全班同学提问,巩固复习句型。）

T: What’s the weather like today in Chengdu?

What about Xi’an?

Ss: It’s fine and sunny in Chengdu.

In Xi’an it is sunny and hot.

T: How was the weather in the past two days in Xi’an?

How about Chengdu?

Ss: It was windy and cloudy in Xi’an.

It was rainy in Chengdu.

T: What’s the highest temperature in Xi’an?

And What’s the temperature in Chengdu?

Ss: It is 35℃ in Xi’an.

In Chengdu it is from 15℃ to 25℃.

（导入下步。）

Step 2 Presentation 第二步 呈现（时间: 10分钟）

1.（老师设问导入阅读）

T: Summer holidays are coming. If you plan to go traveling, which city do you want to go, Xi’an or Chengdu?

Ss: Chengdu.

T: Why?

Ss: It is not very hot. It is cool.

T: Right. Good idea. But there are better places to travel.

Now turn to Page 81. Read the passage in 1a.

Find your favorite place for traveling on summer holidays.

Ss: OK.

2.（学生阅读,老师挂上世界天气预报图。）

T: First, please finish 1b.

（5分钟后老师和学生共同商讨核对答案。）

T: Number 1, is the weather in England the same as that in Australia?

Ss: No.

T: Number 2, what’s the weather like in England in August?

Ss: It is hot and rains a lot.

T: Number 3, what season is it in Australia in August?

3.（老师找一学生3回答。）

S3: It is winter.

Ss: Right.

T: Number 4,does it rain a lot in China?

（老师找另一学生4回答。）

S4: No, sometimes it rains.

Ss: Right.

4.（完成1c,两人讨论暑假去哪里度过？需要注意什么问题？依据1a的短文。）

T: Talk with your partner about where you are going for your holidays and why.

5.（学生结对讨论。）

T: Now, report your favorite place to our class.

S5: My favorite place is Kunming,China. Because the weather is fine there. The wind blows

softly. It is a good place to spend holidays.

S6: My favorite place is Australia. Because it is sunny and not very cold there. It is winter now. I like winter very much.

S7: I like England best. Because it is hot. It rains a lot there. I plan to go there. I can bring my umbrella there. I like rainy days very much.

S8: My favorite place is China. It’s near. Travelling in China is not expensive.

Step 3 Consolidation 第三步 巩固（时间: 10分钟）

（全班分成四组。每组抽出来一人组成新的四人小组。对照天气预报图。第一人选择自己最佳旅游城市。第二人为其做天气预报。第三人宣布注意事项。第四人拿上正确的所带物品,做好旅游准备。老师取出所有教具。）

T: Here are the things you have to take when you travel. Please work in four.

T: The first one tells the class his／her favorite place to travel.

The second one makes a weather report for him／her.

The third one makes suggestion for him／her.

The last one, please get ready for traveling.

（学生对照世界天气预报图,随意发挥表演。全班同学观看。一边获取信息,一边核实活动情况是否真实。）

Group 1

S1: My favorite place to travel is Washington D.C.

S2: It’s sunny and hot.

S3: You should wear your sunglasses.

S4: OK.

（学生4戴上太阳镜背上旅行包准备出发。）

Group 2

S1: My favorite place to spend my summer holdays is Canada.

S2: It’s not very hot. The temperature is from 15℃ to 25℃.

S3: It is a good place for traveling.

（学生4背上旅行包出发,犹豫了一会儿拿上了照相机。因为没有得到明确指示。）

Group 3

S1: I want to go to Japan.

S2: It is rainy and wet.

S3: You should take your umbrella with you.

S4: OK.

（学生4背上旅行包,带上伞准备出发。）

Group 4

S1: My favorite place is Australia.

S2: It is very cold and sunny.

S3: You should take warm clothes with you.

S4: OK.

（学生背上旅行包戴上毛围巾开始出发。）

Group 5

S1: I want to travel in Cuba.

S2: It is sunny and hot.

S3: You should wear your cap.

S4: OK.

（学生4背上旅行包,戴上太阳帽准备出发,突然想到还应戴上太阳镜。突然听到S3发话。）

S3: But suddenly it snows.

（学生4匆忙转身拿上毛围巾,还没出发,又听S3说。）

S3: Now it rains heavily.

（学生4又匆忙转身拿上雨伞,要出发,又听S3说。）

S3: In the afternoon,it’s nice and bright. It is sunny.

（学生4干脆转身把照相机也带上。）

（活动结束。全班同学兴致昂然,意犹未尽。）

（此活动中遇到生词,老师可拿教具实物做提示。例: sunglasses）

Step 4 Practice第四步 练习（时间: 10分钟）

1.（老师取出上节课学生做的单词卡片等教具,上面有描述天气的词。）

T: Look at the card in my hand.Read the word, please.

Ss: Snow.

T: Make a sentence with it.

Ss: It snows in winter.／There is snow on the ground.

T: Now, read this one, please.

（老师取出另一张。）

Ss: Snowy.

T: Give me a sentence.

Ss: Sometimes it is snowy in winter.

T: Right. Snow is a noun. Snowy is an adjective.

T: It is the same. Now, read this one, please.

（老师取出另一张。）

Ss: Sun.

T: A sentence, please.

Ss: The sun shines brightly.

T: This one, please.

Ss: Sunny.

T: A sentence, please.

Ss: It’s sunny today.

T: Right.Sun is a noun.Sunny is an adjective.

（至此,学生心领神会。配合老师学完构词法,关于天气的词,由名词变形容词的规则。）

2.（读的过程中,老师可引导学生不断扩充句子,复习天气预报所用句型,为下一环节天气预报写作打基础。）

Example:

T: Read it, please.

Ss: Cloud. There is a lot of cloud in the air.（老师订正为in the sky。）

Cloudy. It was cloudy yesterday.

T: And the temperature?

Ss: The lowest temperature is 10℃.

The highest temperature is 20℃.

（老师可用天气预报图作提示。）

T: Next one, please.

Ss: Fog. There is a little fog today.

T: This one, please.

Ss: Foggy. It is often foggy in Chengdu.

T: What was the weather like yesterday in Beijing?

Ss: It was sunny.

T: What’s the date today?

Ss: It’s June 15th.

T: Tomorrow is June 16th. What will the weather be like in Beijing?

Ss: It will be sunny, too.

T: What day is it today?

Ss: It is Thursday.

T: It will be Friday tomorrow.

And the weather will be hot.

（由此导入用将来时询问天气的句型。）

Step 5 Project 第五步 综合探究活动（时间: 10分钟）

1. T: Turn to Page 82. Read the chart and the weather report.

Use six sentences or more to write a new weather report.

（学生写完后,小组活动,互相阅读,批改,挑出最好的,向班级汇报。）

Example:

Here is the weather report on February 21st for Sydney. It will be foggy. The highest temperature is 20℃. The lowest temperature is 15℃. It’s a good place to travel. You can take your cap and camera with you.

Here is the weather report on February 22nd for Toronto. It will be snowy. The lowest temperature is -10℃. The highest temperature is -4℃. It will be very cold. You must take your warm clothes with you. It is not a good place for traveling.

Here is the weather report on February 23rd for New York. It will be cloudy. The lowest temperature is 3℃. The highest temperature is 7℃. If you go there, please take your umbrella with you.

2.（完成3。）

T: If your friend wants to go on a trip in a big city, please try to find the information about the weather and give him／her suggestions.

3.（要求学生把建议写下,通过e瞞ail发给朋友。此项活动为本节课后用。）

Write your suggestions down. Send it to your friend by e瞞ail.

(附板书。)

Section D

The main activities are 1a and 5. 本课重点活动是1a和5。

Ⅰ. Teaching aims and demands教学目标

1. Learn some useful words and expressions:

hopeful, heavily,crop, ripe, busy,havest, leaf （p1. leaves）strongly,come back to life

2. Learn some useful sentences:

Which season do you like best, spring, summer, fall or winter?

It is a good season for hiking.

It’s a good time to climb mountains.

3. Learn to describe the differences between seasons:

It is a hopeful season.

It is the harvest season.

...many trees and flowers come back to life in March.

Winter lasts from December to February.

Ⅱ. Teaching aids教具

四幅反映四季自然界不同变化的教学挂图／几幅有天气图标的中国天气预报图

Ⅲ. Five-finger Teaching Plan 五指教学方案

Step 1 Review 第一步 复习（时间: 10分钟）

1.（分组活动。收集描写四季不同之处的句子在黑板上。）

T: There are four words on the blackboard:

2.（全班按座位分成四组。）

T: There are four seasons in a year, but they are all different. Now, Let’s see how they are different.

Group 1, please write down the sentences describing spring.

Group 2, please write and tell us what summer is like.

Group 3, please work for fall.

Group 4, please describe how winter is different from others.

Ss: OK.

（学生开始分组活动。老师在旁边观看,指点和纠正一些必要的错误。）

（活动结果板书预计如下。）

spring summer fall winter

（1）It’s warm. （1）It’s hot. （1）It’s cool. （1）It’s cold.

（2）It’s from December to February. （2）It’s from March to May. （2）It’s from June to August. （2）It’s from September to November.

（3）It’s a good season for hiking. （3）It’s a good season for swimming. （3）It’s a good season for climbing mountains. （3）It’s a good season for making snowmen.

（4）It’s often sunny. （4）It sometimes rains. （4）It is often windy. （4）It sometimes snows.

（5）Spring is green. （5）Summer is bright. （5）Fall is yellow. （5）Winter is white.

（6）I can fly kites. （6）I can wear sunglasses and shorts. （6）

I can eat apples. （6）I can skate.

（7）When it rains,it is wet. （7）It’s dry. （7）We can go traveling. （7）We can wear warm clothes.

(8）We can wear light clothes. （8）We can have summer holidays. （8）We can begin our new term. （8）We can have winter holidays.

（9）Trees come back to life. （9）The highest temperature can be 37℃ sometimes. (9) We can eat different kinds of fruit. (9)The lowest

temperature can be -17℃ sometimes.

（10）The wind blows softly. （10）Sometimes it rains suddenly. （10）Leaves begin to fall from the trees. （10）Farmers are not busy.

（导入下步。）

Step 2 Presentation 第二步 呈现（时间: 10分钟）

1.（完成1a,1b。）

T: Turn to Page 83, read the passage in 1a and finish 1b.

（学生独自阅读。老师个别指点,辅导速度慢的同学。8分钟后核对答案。）

T: Now, let’s see what your answers are.

Spring: March, April, May/ come back to life ／warm／ a hopeful season

Summer: in June／hot／often rains,sometimes it rains heavily

Fall: after summer ／ the harvest season／fruit and crops are ripe ／ the farmers are busy harvesting ／ cool

Winter: from December to February ／cold／warm clothes／the leaves fall from the trees／sometimes it snows

2.（学生自己活动,根据自己所做的笔记,不看课本,复述短文。）

Example:

In China, spring returns and many things come back to life in March. The weather gets warm. It is a hopeful season.

Summer begins in June. It is very hot.

Fruit and crops are ripe in fall, and the farmers are busy harvesting.

Then winter comes. It lasts from December to February. We all wear warm clothes, and the leaves fall from the trees. Sometimes it snows.

Step 3 Consolidation 第三步 巩固（时间: 5分钟）

1.（完成2。）

T: Listen and fill in the blanks according to the information you hear.

（看学生做完后。）

T: Now, check your answers with your partner.

2.（完成4。）

T: Read the chart on Page 84 and complete the sentences.

Ss: All right.

Answers:

Today is June 2nd. The TV says the weather is sunny. The highest temperature is 30℃. June 1st was cloudy and sunny. The lowest temperature was 18℃ and the highest temperature was 26℃.

Step 4 Practice 第四步 练习（时间: 10分钟）

1.（两个小组活动。用比较级最高级讨论自己喜欢的和最喜欢的东西,季节和活动等。）

Example:

S1: I like T-shirts better. I like fruit best. What about you?

S2: I like football better.

I like computer games best.

S3: I like reading books better.

I like English best. And you?

S4: I like physics better.

I like maths better.

S5: I like drawing better.

I like music best. What’s your favorite season?

S6: I like fall better.

I like spring best.

S8: Hi. Which do you like better, by bus or by bike?

And which do you like best, on foot, by subway or by ship?

S9: By bus. On foot.

S10: Which do you like better, red or black?

Which do you like best, green, blue or purple?

S11: I like red better.My favorite color is purple.

S12: Which do you like better, Beijing or Kunming?

Which do you like best, New York, Toronto or Washington D.C?

S13: I like Beijing better.I plan to travel in Toronto, so that’s my favorite city.

2.（挂出天气预报图。四人一组,向天气预报员,为指定地点作天气预报,选出最佳预报员,向全班汇报。）

Example:

Today is June 3rd. The TV says the weather is rainy. The highest temperature is 20℃.

Today is June 5th. The TV says the weather will be cloudy. The highest temperature is 23℃. The lowest temperature is 15℃.

Today is June 6th. The TV says the weather will be snowy. The lowest temperature is -10℃. The highest temperature is 5℃.

Step 5 Project 第五步 综合探究活动（时间: 10分钟）

1.（复习巩固本topic要点。）

T: We have learned all the Sections of this topic.

Please go back to Section A, Section B and Section C.

Review all the words and sentences of seasons and weather.

Don’t forget the favorite activities.

Write them down in your notebook.

Then report to the class what we learned in this topic.

Ss: OK.

（学生埋头复习,巩固,总结本topic重难点,作好报告准备。）

T: Now, time is up.

Who would like to be the first to make your report to our class?

SA: We know words of seasons.

Spring, summer, fall and winter.

SB: We know words of weather.

They are warm, hot, cool and cold.

SC: We have other words of weather.

Snow, rain, fog, wind.

SD: Sunny, rainny, snowy, foggy, windy, cloudy.

SE: There are sentences:

What’s the weather like in spring?

It’s warm.

SF: How is the weather in summer?

It’s hot.

SG: How was the weather yesterday?

It was cloudy.

SH: It is a good season for hiking.

SI: It is a good time for swimming.

SJ: Look! what are they doing?

They are rowing boats and a boy is riding a bike.

SK: What is the temperature?

It is from 15℃25℃.

SL: The highest temperature is 35℃.

The lowest temperature is 5℃.

SM: What’s your favorite season?

Which do you like better?

SN: Spring returns and many things come back to life in March.

SO: This is a hopeful season.

Summer begins in June.

SP: Fall comes after summer. This is the harvest season. Fruit and crops are ripe.

SQ: It lasts from December to February.

We all wear warm clothes, and the leaves fall from the trees. Sometimes it snows.

2.（小组活动。讨论不同季节不同的服装穿戴,和各种喜欢的运动。也可把活动画出来,和同学谈论。）

3. Homework:

（把自己一年四季不同的所喜欢的衣服和活动写成一篇短文。不少于6句话。）

T: Here is your homework. Write down a passage about your favorite clothes and activities in different seasons.

七年级下册英语课件【篇11】

Unit 1 Can you play the guitar ?】

1、can+动词原形，它不随主语和数而变化。

(1)含有can的肯定句：主语+can+谓语动词的原形+其他。

(2)变一般疑问句时，把can提前：Can+主语+动词原形+其他?

肯定回答：Yes，主语+can。否定回答：No，主语+can't.

(3)含有can的否定句：主语+can't+动词的原形+其他。

(4)含有can的特殊疑问句：特殊疑问词+can+主语+动词原形+其他?

2、may+动词的原形。(may为情态动词)一般疑问句是把may提前，

肯定回答是：Yes，主语 +may。否定回答是：No，主语+mustn't。或please don't。

join+某个组织，俱乐部，party，参军，党派等 “加入”

Join sb. “参加到某人中” join in (doing)sth “加入做......，参加某个活动” Join in=take part in +活动，比赛

3、说某种语言：speak+语言 4、play+球、棋、牌;play+the+乐器。

5、擅长于(做)什么：be good at +名词/动ing

6、帮助某人做某事：help sb. (to ) do sth. help sb. with sth.

7、我能知道你名字吗?May I know your name?

8、想要做什么：want to do sth 例如：I want to learn about art.

9、What club do you want to join?

I want to join the chess club and the basketball club.

10、What club does Tom want to join? He wants to join the swimming club .

11、He can’t play the violin or the piano. Can you help kids with swimming?

12、Why do you want to join the English club? Because I want to learn English well.

七年级下册英语课件【篇12】

unit3 last weekend

第四课时 教学设计

一、教学设计思路

本课时的主要教学内容是不规则动词go的过去式以及有关环保的一些常见标志。本课时中，教师可以首先通过free talk带领学生一起巩固前几节课的动词短语过去式和句型；然后，通过教师介绍自己昨天的活动引入不规则动词read及go的过去式，went to a park, went swimming, went fishing, went hiking都是有关go的过去式，因此，教师可以只向学生介绍其中一个短语的过去式，然后让学生自己分析并举一反三；最后，通过看图讨论一些重大发明来进一步巩固过去式短语及句型。

二、教学目标

（一）知识

听、说、读、写短语：went to a park, went swimming, read a book, went fishing, went hiking。

听、说、认读句子：What did you do yesterday I went hiking.（二）能力

能够在实际情景中运用以上短语及句型。

能够理解并会唱 “At the Zoo”。

能够熟悉Good to know中的标志。

（三）情感

通过熟悉Good to know部分，增强学生的环保意识。

三、教学重点

短语went to a park, went swimming, read a book, went fishing, went hiking的听、说、读、写。

难点：掌握不规则动词的过去式形式。

四、教学媒体

1．Let’s learn部分短语图片及Good to know部分四个标志牌的图片。

2．录音机和本课时的磁带。

4．有关重大发明挂图。

3．教学课件

五、教学过程

1．导入

1）Daily Greeting

2）Free talk

T: What day is today?

A: Today is…

T: What day was yesterday?(强调 yesterday)

B: Yesterday/ It was…

T: What did you do yesterday?

C: I(did)…yesterday.(用前几课时已经学的词组)

3）教师播放歌曲本单元歌曲 “At the Zoo”，让学生欣赏。

2．呈现新课

1）Let’s learn

T: What did you do yesterday?

…

T: Who read a book yesterday?（教师做出读书的动作，帮助学生理解）…

教师分别说句子：I often read a book in the evening.I read a book yesterday.让学生去发现两个句子中read发音的不同。

教师一张张呈现go to a park, go swimming, read a book, go fishing, go hiking的图片，让学生先复习这些动词短语原形。

教师让学生看课本P31 Amy和Bai Lin的对话：

教师扮演Amy，让一名学生扮演Bai Lin，进行对话：

S: What did you do yesterday?

T: I went hiking.教师重复两边I went hiking.教师让学生发现went与go的关系。

让学生进行举一反三练习：假如以上提到有关go的动词短语是学生昨天的活动，教师进行提问

T: What did you do yesterday?

…（学生任选以上go短语进行回答）

教师根据学生对went的掌握情况调整教学。

2）Let’s play

将学生分组，4-6人一组，按照Let’s play部分自制表格，人物为该小组的成员。边对话边记录，然后做成表格再进行对话练习。

最后，教师鼓励各个小组将表格内容进行整体表述，形成一篇小短文，并进行表达。

3）Let’s sing

T: I went to the zoo yesterday.What did I see? Do you want to know?

Ss: …

T: Ok, let’s sing the song and let’s see what saw at the zoo.教师播放歌曲录音，学生听录音哼唱两边后跟录音齐唱。

然后，男女生对唱或按座位分组对唱。

4）Good to know

教师出示准备好的各种标志牌，请学生讲讲各标志的含义（本部分的四个标志牌分别表示：No fishing, No swimming, No dogs peeing, No dogs pooping），和学生一起讨论环境保护的重要性。鼓励学生课下自己设计一些标志图，下节课带来全班一起传阅。

3．趣味操练

活动：看图讨论

活动目的：练习运用一般过去时陈述过去的重大发明。

活动准备：一幅呈现着多种发明的大挂图。

活动过程：将挂图张贴在黑板上。将学生分成四组来分别讨论，并简单地用英语来陈述挂图上各种发明的时间、地点及发明人。然后向全班同汇报。看哪一组同学知道得多，陈述得准确。

4．课堂评价

完成本课时活动手册的相关练习，评价学生对不规则动词过去式形式的掌握情况。另外，教师在学生完成Let’s play任务及看图讨论中体现学生的自我评价及教师对各小组的评价。

5．课后作业

练习本课时的重点词汇，收集生活中常见的标志。